Rio (2016) - Car KIA - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Car
Brand	Kia
Model	Rio (2016)
Vehicle Type	Subcompact
Engine	1.6L I4
Power Output	103 kW (138 hp)
Torque	167 Nm
Transmission	6-Speed Manual or Automatic
Drivetrain	Front-Wheel Drive
Length	4365 mm
Width	1720 mm
Height	1455 mm
Wheelbase	2580 mm
Curb Weight	1145 kg
Fuel Tank Capacity	43 L
Fuel Economy Combined	6.0 L/100 km
Brake System	Front Disc, Rear Drum
Safety Features	Airbags, ABS, ESC
Engine Oil	5W-30
Oil Capacity	4.0 L
Maintenance Interval	15,000 km or 12 months
Spare Tire	Temporary (T125/80D15)
Seating Capacity	5

Frequently Asked Questions - Rio (2016) KIA

How often should I change the oil in my 2016 Kia Rio?

Kia recommends changing the engine oil every 15,000 km or 12 months, whichever comes first. Use 5W-30 oil with API SN or higher rating.

What is the towing capacity of a 2016 Kia Rio?

The 2016 Kia Rio is not designed for towing. It has no factory towing rating, so avoid towing to prevent damage.

How do I reset the service light on a 2016 Kia Rio?

To reset the service light, turn the ignition ON, press the TRIP button until 'OIL CHANGE' appears, then hold the button for 5 seconds until the light blinks. Press again to reset.

What type of transmission fluid does the 2016 Kia Rio use?

For automatic transmissions, use Kia ATF SP-IV or equivalent. Manual transmissions use MTF 75W85. Always check the owner's manual.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth in a 2016 Kia Rio?

Ensure Bluetooth is on your phone. Press the PHONE button on the steering wheel, then select 'Add New Device' on the display. Select your car from the phone list and confirm the PIN.

What is the recommended tire pressure for a 2016 Kia Rio?

Recommended tire pressure is 33 psi (230 kPa) for both front and rear tires. Check the sticker on the driver's door jamb for exact values.

How do I open the fuel door on a 2016 Kia Rio?

Push the rear edge of the fuel door to release it. The fuel cap is a twist-off type. Always use unleaded gasoline with octane rating 87 or higher.

Where is the VIN number located on a 2016 Kia Rio?

The VIN is visible through the windshield on the driver's side dashboard. It is also on the driver's door jamb sticker and in the engine compartment near the firewall.

How do I replace a headlight bulb on a 2016 Kia Rio?

Turn the steering wheel to access the bulb cover behind the wheel well. Remove the cover, twist the bulb holder counterclockwise, and replace with a H7 bulb for low beam. Be careful not to touch the glass.

What is the battery type for a 2016 Kia Rio?

The battery is a 12V 45Ah with group size 35. When replacing, ensure the battery is properly secured and terminals are clean.

USER MANUAL Rio (2016) KIA

Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner's Manual was accurate at the time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be carried out.

This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your Kia Dealer knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.

Because subsequent owners require this important information as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2015 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.

All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in whole or in part without the written consent of Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.

Printed in Korea

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction

How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag

Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Trunk / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors / Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.

Driving your vehicle

Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system / Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergency

Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.

Maintenance

Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

Introduction

How to use this manual....1-2

Fuel requirements 1-3

• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol ..... 1-3
- Do not use methanol....1-4
- Fuel Additives .... 1-5
• Operation in foreign countries ..... 1-5

Vehicle break-in process 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-6

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

You will find various types of safety instructions in this manual. These instructions were prepared to enhance your personal safety. Carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these instructions.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.

\*NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

CAUTION

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.)

WARNING - Refueling

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off. Attempts to force more fuel into the tank can cause fuel overflow onto you and the ground causing a risk of fire.
  • Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

\*NOTICE

Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, otherwise the fuel cap open warning indicator Right will illuminate.

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol may be used in your vehicle.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Ethanol provides less energy than gasoline and it attracts water, and it is thus likely to reduce your fuel efficiency and could lower your MPG results.

Methanol may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol. "E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of "E85" may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system. Kia recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10 percent.

\*NOTICE

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance problems caused by the use of "E85" fuel.

Other fuels

Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si), MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene (Fe), and Other metallic additives, may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting, clogging, abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction, etc.

Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may illuminate.

\*NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Kia does not recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and affect your emission control system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the cluster may come on.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Fuel Additives

Kia recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. For more information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.top-tiergas.com).

For customers who do not use TOP Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately may be added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to the fuel tank at every 7,500 mile or every engine oil change is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

No special break-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of operation.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

* How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview I....2-2

Exterior overview II....2-3

Interior overview 2-4

Instrument panel overview 2-5

Engine compartment 2-6

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW I

Front

- 4 Door

- 5 Door

1. Hood 4-31
2. Headlamp 7-78
3. Fog light 7-78

4. Tires and wheels....7-51

5. Outside rearview mirror.....4-43

6. Sunroof 4-36
7. Wiper blade....7-45
8. Windows 4-26

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OUB024003N/OUB025003K

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW II

Rear
-4 Door

• 5 Door
  

1. Door 4-17
2. Fuel filler lid 4-33
3. Rear combination lamp 7-83

4. Tailgate (trunk) 4-22, 24

5. Rear wiper blade .....7-46

6. Center high mounted stop light .....7-88
7. Rear window defroster.....4-87
8. Antenna 4-125

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OUB025004N/OUB025008N

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Door lock/unlock button 4-18
2. Central door lock switch.....4-19
3. Power window switches 4-26
4. Power window lock button .....4-29
5. Outside rearview mirror control switch....4-44
6. Hood release lever....4-31
7. Fuel filler lid release lever....4-33
8. Trunk lid release lever (4 door).....4-22
9. Steering wheel....4-40
10. Steering wheel tilt control lever.....4-41
11. Active ECO button 5-45
12. Instrument panel illumination control switch....4-47
13. ESC OFF button 5-27
14. Heated steering wheel switch (if equipped)....4-41
15. Idle Stop and Go system OFF button (if equipped)....5-41
16. Fuse box....7-66
17. Brake pedal....5-22
18. Accelerator pedal

OUB021001K

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Instrument cluster....4-46
2. Horn 4-42
3. Driver's front air bag....3-42
4. Light control/Turn signals .....4-77
5. Wiper/Washer....4-81
6. Ignition switch or ENGINE START/ STOP button ....5-5, 5-7
7. Hazard warning flasher switch .....4-77, 6-2
8. Audio....4-125
9. Climate control system .....4-88, 4-98
10. Shift lever....5-13, 5-16
11. Steering wheel audio control.....4-126
12. Passenger's front air bag ....3-42
13. Glove box 4-114
14. Parking brake lever 5-24
15. Power outlet 4-121
16. Cigarette lighter 4-118
17. Seat warmer 3-8

OUB025002N

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine Coolant Reservoir....7-36
2. Engine Oil Filler Cap....7-35
3. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir .....7-39
4. Air Cleaner 7-41
5. Fuse Box....7-66
6. Negative Battery Terminal......6-5, 7-48
7. Positive Battery Terminal .....6-5, 7-48
8. Radiator Cap....7-37
9. Engine Oil Dipstick....7-35
10. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir..7-40

OUB071103N

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats....3-2

• Front seat 3-4
• Rear seat....3-9

Seat belts 3-13

• Seat belt restraint system .... 3-13
  • Pre-tensioner seat belt. 3-18
• Seat belt precautions. 3-20
  • Care of seat belts 3-22

Child restraint system 3-23

• Using a child restraint system ..... 3-24
- Automatic locking mode .... 3-25
- Tether Anchor system .... 3-28
- Lower anchor system .... 3-29

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system 3-31

• How does the air bag system operate ..... 3-32
• Air bag warning light 3-34
• SRS components and functions ..... 3-34
• Occupation classification system ..... 3-37
- Driver's and passenger's front air bag .... 3-42
- Side impact air bag 3-45
• Curtain air bag 3-46
• SRS care 3-53
• Air bag warning label .... 3-54

SEAT

* The actual seats in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OUB035001N

Driver's seat

(1) Forward and rearward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height*
(4) Seat warmer*
(5) Headrest

Front passenger's seat

(6) Forward and rearward
(7) Seatback angle
(8) Seat warmer*
(9) Headrest

Rear seat

(10) Headrest*
(11) Seatback folding*

WARNING - Loose objects

Do not place anything in the driver's foot well or under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals.

WARNING - Uprighting seat

Do not press the release lever on a manual seatback without holding and controlling the seatback. The seatback will spring upright possibly impacting you or other passengers.

WARNING - Seat cushion

Occupants should never sit on aftermarket seat cushions or sitting cushions. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.

WARNING - Driver responsibility for passengers

3D rendered human figure seated in a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the figure itself)

The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion. If a seat is reclined during an accident, the occupant's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt, applying great force to the unprotected abdomen.

WARNING - Driver's seat

• Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of the seatback and seatback adjustment.
• Sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable control of your vehicle. A distance of at least 10" from your chest to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so can result in airbag inflation injuries to the driver.

WARNING - Seat adjustment

• Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat forward will cause strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near the seat bottom or seat track while adjusting the seat. Your hand could get caught in the seat mechanism.

WARNING - Small Objects

Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seats mechanism.

Car seat assembly diagram showing side and front views with highlighted seat spacing (no text or symbols)

Front seat adjustment

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

WARNING - Unexpected seat movement

After adjusting a manual seat, always check that it is locked by shifting your weight to the front and back. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

Seat height (if equipped) (for driver's seat)

To change the height of the seat, move the lever upwards or downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push down the lever several times.
  • To raise the seat cushion, pull up the lever several times.

Top-down diagram of a car showing three seats and two side seats, with two yellow arrows indicating specific positions (no text or symbols present)

Headrest

The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes.

Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible.

For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

WARNING - Headrest removal/adjustment

• Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed. Headrests can provide critical neck and head support in a crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion. Driver may lose control of the vehicle.

Side profile of a humanoid robot head with a yellow arrow pointing to the nose area (no text or symbols visible)

Forward and backward adjustment

The headrest may be adjusted forward to 4 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired detent. To adjust the headrest to it's furthest backwards position, pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it. Adjust the headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck.

OUB031005OUB03100:

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

3D illustration of a car interior with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

\*NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the headrest and seat cushion raised, the headrest may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the recline lever (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button (3) while pulling the headrest up (4).

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the holes while pressing the release button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the recline lever (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat with the headrest removed.

WARNING - Headrest Reinstallation

To reduce the risk of injury to the head or neck, always make sure the head rest is locked into position and adjusted properly after reinstalling.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism with highlighted motion arrows (no text or symbols)

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmers are provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

CAUTION - Seat damage

- When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers while the seat warmer is in operation.

- Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.

WARNING - Seat warmer burns

The seat warmer may cause burns, even at low temperatures, if used over a long period of time. Never allow passengers who may not be able to take care of themselves to be exposed to the risk of seat heater burns. These include:

1. Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)

Interior view of a car showing a textured surface and a small object on the side (no visible text or symbols)

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passenger's seatback.

WARNING - Seatback pocket

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pocket. An occupant could contact such objects in a crash. Heavy objects in the front passenger seatback could also interfere with the airbag sensing system.

Top-down view of a car showing the roof, side seats, and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Rear seat adjustment

Headrest

The rear seat is equipped with head-rests in all the seating positions for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

To help maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head.

Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height as the top of their eyes. Also adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

Adjusting the height up and down (if equipped)

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling the headrest upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the appropriate height and ensure that it locks in position.

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING - Folded Seatback

Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING - Objects

Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard, with a magnified inset highlighting a yellow curved component (no text or symbols)

OUB031049K OUB031051K OUB032049

To fold down the rear seatback:

• 4 door

1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing is in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position.

4. Pull the lock release lever (1) and fold the rear seatback forward and down firmly.

If the seat belt remains extended after returning the seatback to it's upright position, pull the seatbelt outward and release to retract the seatbelt.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seatbelt with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

- 5 door

1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing is in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to lowest position.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with yellow directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the lock release lever (1) and fold the rear seatback forward and down firmly.

If the seat belt locks after unfolding the rear seatback, pull out the locked seat belt, release it then pull it out again.

To unfold the rear seat

1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward. Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

If you can not see the red line at the bottom of folding lever, it means the seatback is locked completely.

1. Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.
2. When the seatback is completely installed, check the seatback folding lever again.

When returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position.

WARNING - Rear seat-back

When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter the passenger compartment.

WARNING - Cargo

Do not place heavy objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a frontal collision.

SEAT BELTS

Seat belt restraint system

Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.

Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.

- For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the vehicle is moving. A properly positioned shoulder belt should be positioned midway over your shoulder across your collarbone.

- Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. See child restraint system section for further discussion.

⚠ WARNING - Shoulder belt

Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. An improperly positioned shoulder belt cannot protect the occupant in a crash.

⚠ WARNING - Damaged seat belt

Replace the entire seat belt assembly if any part of the webbing or hardware is damaged as you can no longer be sure that a damaged seat belt will provide protection in a crash.

⚠ WARNING - Twisted seat belt

Make sure your seat belt is not twisted when worn. A twisted seat belt may not properly protect you in an accident and could even cut into your body.

⚠ WARNING - Seat belt buckle

Do not allow foreign material (gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to obstruct the seat belt buckle. This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.

1GQA2083

Seat belt warning (for driver's seat) The driver's seat belt warning light and chime will activate to the following table when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt	Vehicle Speed	Light-Blink	Chime-Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled → Unbuckled	Below 3 mph (5 km/h)	6 seconds	None
	3 mph~ 6 mph	6 seconds
	Above 6 mph (10 km/h)	6 sec. on / 24 sec. off (11 times)
Unbuckled	Above 6 mph (10 km/h) ↓ Below 3 mph (5 km/h)	6 seconds *1 ↓ Stop *2

*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times with an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's seat belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

Seat belt warning (for front passenger's seat)

The front passenger's seat belt warning light will activate to the following table when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt	Vehicle Speed	Light-Blink
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Unbuckled	Above 6mph (10 km/h)	Continuously
Buckled 6 seconds
Buckled → Unbuckled	Above 6mph (10 km/h)	Continuously *1
	Below 6mph (10 km/h)	None

*1 The seat belt warning light will go off if the vehicle speed decreases below 3 mph (5 km/h). If the vehicle speed increases above 3 mph (5 km/h), the warning light will blink again.

• You can find the front passenger's seat belt warning light on the center fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is not occupied, the seat belt warning light will blink for 6 seconds.
• The seat belt warning light can blink when a briefcase or purse is placed on the front passenger seat.

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the front passenger's seat belt warning system. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too close to your neck. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

WARNING - Shoulder belt positioning

Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

WARNING - Seat belt replacement

Replace your seat belts after being in an accident. Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of another collision.

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and belt, with a yellow arrow pointing to the belt (no text or symbols present)

You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision.

The arm closest to the seat belt buckle should be over the belt while the other arm should be under the belt as shown in the illustration.

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, it is strongly recommended that children always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). Refer to "Using a child restraint system" in this section.

To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted, showing the belt and buckle (no text or symbols visible)

When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the "CENTER" mark must be used.

Close-up of hands adjusting a belt buckle with a yellow arrow indicating the buckle's direction (no text or symbols present)

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (1) of the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Illustration of a car interior showing two people seated, one inside the dashboard and the other in the seat, with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pretensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions (or side collisions). The pretensioner seat belts may be activated in crashes, where the frontal collision is severe enough.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body. If the system senses excessive seat belt tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration:

1.SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3.SRS control module
4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly

Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioners will not be activated if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision.

\*NOTICE

When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

WARNING - Skin irritation

Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated. The fine dust from the pre-tensioner activation may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods.

Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag warning light ( ²⁰ ) on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner seat belt does not work properly, this warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag has not malfunctioned. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, please have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Hot preten- sioner

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism fires during a collision the pre-tensioner becomes hot and can burn you.

Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. If the pre-tensioner must be replaced, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

Seat belt precautions

Infant or small child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. For more information about the use of these restraints, refer to "Child restraint system" in this section.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened and snugged on the hips and as low as possible. Check if the belt fits periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 12) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system.

WARNING - Small children

Do not allow small children to ride in the vehicle without an appropriate child restraint system. If the shoulder belt comes in contact with your child's neck or face your child is too small to ride in the vehicle. In a crash the seat belt will inflict injury to your child's neck, throat and face.

Restraint of pregnant women

Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors. The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS POSSIBLE.

WARNING - Pregnant women

Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the seat belt above or on the abdomen where the fetus is located. The force of the seat belt during a collision will crush the fetus.

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front seats should be in an upright position when the vehicle is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front seat is in a reclined position.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING - Pinched seat belt

Make sure that the webbing and/or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat when returning the rear seatback to its upright position. A caught or pinched webbing/buckle may become damaged and could fail during a collision or sudden stop.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized Kia dealer.

Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children who are not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided.

You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by seat belt, or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH anchors (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING - Restraint location

Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat.

A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING - Hot child restraint

A child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. Be sure to check the seat cover, buckles and latches before placing a child in the restraint system.

When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat belt so that it will not be thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.

WARNING - Holding children

Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the car's interior. Always use a child restraint system which is appropriate for your child's height and weight.

WARNING - Unattended Children

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. The car can heat up very quickly, resulting in injuries to the child in the vehicle.

WARNING - Seat belt use

Do not use one seat belt for two occupants at the same time. This will eliminate any safety benefit provided by the seat belt to the occupants.

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Forward-facing child restraint system

Illustration of a child sitting in a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend that the child restraint system be used in the rear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock mode), you must manually change these seat belts to the auto lock mode to secure a child restraint.

If the seat belt does not operate as described in this section, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Child seat installation

• Always follow the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Child restraint system manufacturers know their products best.
- Failure to observe this manual's instructions regarding child restraint system and the instructions provided with the child restraint system could result in the improper installation of the child restraint system which may reduce the protection to your child in a crash or a sudden stop.

NOTICE

If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual), the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

Technical illustration of a car seatbelt assembly (no text or symbols)

Placing a passenger seat belt into the auto lock mode

The auto lock mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted for a hand (no text or symbols)

To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system in the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

Illustration of a car seatbelt being adjusted for a hand, showing seatbelt buckle and belt (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the "Auto Lock" (child restraint) mode.

Illustration of a hand using a screwdriver to lift a seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

1. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting" sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the "Auto Lock" mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Illustration of a person using a seatbelt to adjust the seat (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
   6.Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.
2. Double check that the retractor is in the "Auto Lock" mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the "Auto Lock" mode.

The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the "emergency lock mode" whenever the belt is allowed to retract fully.

Therefore, the preceding seven steps must be followed each time a child restraint is installed.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

WARNING - Auto lock mode

Set the retractor to Automatic Lock mode when installing any child restraint system.

If the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops suddenly.

Interior view of a car showing a 4-door door, a seatbelt, and a chain link (no text or symbols visible)

Securing a child restraint seat with tether anchorage system Child restraint hook holders are located on the floor behind the rear seats.

Interior view of a car showing a car seat with visible seats and dashboard (no text or symbols)

1. Route the child restraint seat tether strap over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrest, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

1. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat.

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a single lower anchorage point. The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers or anchorage points to break.

Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front, rear, side, and top views (no text or symbols)

Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturers make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children". These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to indicate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints.

WARNING - Unused rear seatbelts

Always fasten the seatbelts behind the child restraint seat when they are not used to secure the child seat. Failure to do so may result in child strangulation.

Medical illustration showing a hand with two inserted medical devices, one highlighted with dotted circles (no text or symbols present)

LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions.

When you install your child's restraint system using the LATCH anchors buckle the shoulder lap belt, then lock the retractor and pull the belt to remove the slack in the belt so it lies flat against the vehicle seat.

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint, assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place.

WARNING - LATCH lower anchors

Never attempt to attach a LATCH equipped seat in the center seating position. LATCH lower anchors are only to be used with the left and right rear outboard seating positions. You may damage the anchors or the anchors may fail and break in a collision.

\*NOTICE

The recommended weight for the LATCH system is under 65 lb (30 kg).

How to calculate the child restraint weight :

Child restraint weight = 65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(1) Driver's front air bag
(2) Passenger's front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag

Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.

OYF039050

How does the air bag system operate

• Air bag are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START the appropriate position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of serious frontal or side collision (if equipped with side impact air bag or curtain air bag) in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

- Air bag deployment depends on a number of complex factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision. Though, factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant.
  It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a severe collision, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to get the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

- There are even circumstances under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel.

WARNING - Airbag inflation

Sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable control of your vehicle. A distance of at least 10" from your chest to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so can result in airbag inflation injuries to the driver.

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest to both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or windows as soon as possible after the impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin (eyes, nose and throat etc). If this is the case, wash and rinse with the cold water immediately and consult the doctor if the symptom persists.

WARNING

- Hot components

Do not touch the air bag storage area's internal components immediately after airbag inflation. The air bag related parts in the steering wheel, instrument panel and the roof rails above the front and rear doors are very hot. Hot components can result in burn injuries.

Installing a child restraint on a front passenger's seat is forbidden

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger's seat. If the air bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraint in the front passenger's seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

WARNING - Air bag deployment

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of a vehicle equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible. Inflation of the side and/or curtain air bags could impact the child.

W7-147

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag-Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the ignition switch is turned ON, the indicator light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.
- The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's front air bag module
   2.Passenger's front air bag module
   3.Side impact air bag modules
2. Curtain air bag modules
3. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*

4. Air bag warning light
   7.SRS control module (SRSCM)
   8.Front impact sensors
   9.Side impact sensors

5. PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator (Front passenger's seat only)

6. Occupant detection system (Front passenger's seat only)
7. Driver's and front passenger's seat belt buckle sensors
8. Anchor pre-tensioner assemblies
   *: if equipped

The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, after which the air bag warning light should go out.

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the SRS. Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

3D rendering of a driver's front air bag (1) showing a seated passenger seat with head lifted, no text or symbols on the diagram itself.

The air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

3D rendered illustration of a driver's front air bag (2) with seat and body positioning, no text or symbols on the diagram itself

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

WARNING - Air bag obstructions

Do not install or place any accessories on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the air bag deploys.

NOTICE

Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.

Occupant detection system

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat.

The occupant detection system is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver's front air bag is not affected or controlled by the occupant detection system.

Main components of occupant detection system

• A detection device located within the front passenger seat track.
• Electronic system to determine whether passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.
- An indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
- The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the occupant detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system determines to be of adult size, and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will turn off and the front passenger's air bag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the conditions 1\~4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly (sitting upright with the seat in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the safety belt properly) for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safety belt.

• The ODS (Occupant Detection System) may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can defeat the detection system. These include:
  (1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
  (2) Leaning against the door or center console.
  (3) Sitting towards the sides or the front of the seat.
  (4) Putting legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system

Condition detected by the occupant detection system	Indicator/Warning light		Devices
	PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator light	SRS warning light	Front passenger air bag
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up *2	Off	Off	Activated
2. Infant or child restraint system with 12 months old *3*4	On	Off	Deactivated
3. Unoccupied	On	Off	Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system	Off	On	Activated

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than the same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.

WARNING - ODS system

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the occupant detection system (ODS) and may result in the deactivation of front passenger airbag. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Illustration of a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

• Never put a heavy load in the front passenger seat.

3D rendered human figure seated in a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the figure itself)

• Never sit with the hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

Illustration of a person seated in a car with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• Never place the feet on the dashboard.

Illustration of a person driving a car with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• Never place the feet on the front passenger seatback.

3D rendered human figure seated in a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the figure itself)

• Never excessively recline the front passenger seatback.

3D illustration of a person seated in a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• Never lean on the door or center console.
• Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

3D rendered illustration of a person seated in a car seat, enclosed within a curved bracket (no text or symbols)

When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

WARNING - "AIR BAG OFF" light

Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a crash. The driver must instruct the passenger to reposition himself in the seat. Failure to properly position yourself may lead to airbag deactivation resulting in airbag non-deployment and in a collision. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator remains illuminated after the passenger repositions themselves properly and the car is restarted, it is recommended that passenger move to the rear seat because the passenger's front air bag will not deploy.

\*NOTICE

The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.

Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

\*NOTICE

Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or attach anything such as a blanket, front seat covers or after market seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection system.

If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate because the passenger's front air bag is connected with the occupant detection system. If there is a malfunction of the occupant detection system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passenger's seat.

Driver's and passenger's front air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.

The indications of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the air bag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver's seat position, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation with two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.

The passenger's front air bag is designed to help reduce the injury of children sitting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions. However, children are safer if they are restraint in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity, seating position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control Module) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see "Occupant detection system" in this section.

Do not place any objects that may cause magnetic fields near the front seat. These may cause a malfunction of the seat track position sensor.

Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a contact point concerning modifications to the vehicle for persons with disabilities, which modifications may affect the vehicle's advanced air bag system. That contact is Kia's toll-free Customer Assistance center at 1-800-333-4Kia. However, Kia does not endorse nor will it support any changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the advanced air bag system, including the occupant detection system.

NOTICE

The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be replaced except by an authorized Kia dealer using original Kia parts designed for this vehicle and model. Any other such replacement or modification could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags.

Advanced air bags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front air bags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt alone.

WARNING - SRS Wiring

Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Side impact air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a side impact air bag in each front seat.

The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

WARNING - Unexpected deployment

Avoid impact to the side impact airbag sensor when the ignition switch is ON to prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag.

The side impact air bag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in operation.

For best protection from the side air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side air bag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps.

WARNING - Deployment

Do not install any accessories including seat covers, on the side or near the side impact air bag as this may affect the deployment of the side air bags.

If seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. Inform that your vehicle is equipped with side impact air bags and an occupant detection system.

WARNING - Flying objects

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side airbag inflates.

Interior view of a car showing the rear and side views of the engine compartment (no text or symbols visible)

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in most rollover situations.

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.

\*NOTICE

Never try to open or repair any components of the side curtain air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized Kia dealer.

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor

WARNING - Air bag sensors

- Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bag or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

- If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should.

Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, body or B pillar where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

Installing aftermarket bumper guards or replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect your vehicle's collision and air bag deployment performance.

Illustration of a person in a car being forced by an explosion, with no visible text or symbols.

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

Interior and exterior views of a car showing a collision between two cars, with no visible text or symbols.

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Side air bags

Side air bags (side impact and/or curtain air bags) are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

Although the front air bags (driver's and front passenger's air bags) are designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient frontal force in another type of impact. Side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions. They may inflate in other type of collisions where a side force is detected by the sensors.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

- In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.

• Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.

Illustration of two cars in motion with a large explosion effect, no visible text or symbols

- Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

Top-down illustration of two cars with a starburst effect, no text or symbols present

- In a slant or angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

Side view of a car parked next to a truck, no visible text or symbols

Black-and-white photo of cars with a large pile of metallic sheets and a smaller car in the background (no visible text or symbols)

- Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to "ride" under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "under-ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly replaced by such "under-ride" collisions.

• Air bags do not inflate in most rollover accidents, even though the vehicle is equipped with side impact air bags and curtain air bags.

3D rendering of a car parked near a vertical pole with a star symbol (no text or symbols present)

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel must be performed by an authorized Kia dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.

⚠ WARNING - Tampering with SRS

Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in the accidental inflation of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. An authorized Kia dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

Safety features of your vehicle

Interior view of a car showing dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

Features of your vehicle

Keys 4-3

- Record your key number 4-3

• Key operations....4-3

Smart key 4-6

- Smart key functions .... 4-6

• Smart key precautions 4-8

Remote keyless entry 4-9

- Remote keyless entry system operations. 4-9

• Transmitter precautions ..... 4-10

- Battery replacement .... 4-11

- Immobilizer system....4-12

Theft-alarm system 4-14

Door locks 4-17

• Outside the vehicle 4-17

• Inside the vehicle 4-18

- Door lock/unlock features....4-20

• Child-protector rear door lock .... 4-20

Trunk. 4-22

Tailgate 4-24

Windows 4-26

Hood. 4-31

Fuel filler lid 4-33

Sunroof 4-36

Steering wheel....4-40

• Electronic power steering (EPS) 4-40

- Tilt and telescoping steering. 4-41

- Heated steering wheel 4-41

• Horn 4-42

Mirrors 4-43

• Inside rearview mirror 4-43

- Outside rearview mirror....4-43

Instrument cluster 4-46

- Instrument panel illumination .... 4-47

• Gauges 4-47

• LCD display....4-50

- Trip computer 4-50

- User settings. 4-55

- Maintenance system 4-57

-Warnings and indicators. 4-70

- Instrument cluster warning and indicators ..... 4-59

Rear-Camera Display 4-76

Hazard warning flasher....4-77

Lighting 4-77

- Battery saver function....4-77

• Lighting control. 4-77

• High beam operation....4-79

- Turn signals and lane change signals ..... 4-80

- Front fog light 4-80

Wipers and washers. 4-81

Interior light 4-85

• Map lamp 4-85

• Room lamp. 4-85

• Luggage room lamp 4-86

• Vanity mirror lamp 4-86

• Glove box lamp 4-86

Defroster 4-87

Manual climate control system 4-88

Automatic climate control system....4-98

Windshield defrosting and defogging.....4-109

Storage compartments....4-114

• Center console storage 4-114

• Glove box 4-114

• Cool box 4-115

• Luggage net holder .... 4-115

• Luggage tray 4-116

- Increase cargo space ....4-117

Interior features 4-118

• Cigarette lighter. 4-118

• Ashtray 4-118

• Cup holder 4-119

- Sliding armrest 4-120

• Sunvisor 4-120

• Power outlet .... 4-121

• Shopping bag holder....4-121

• Digital clock and calendar ..... 4-122

• Clothes hanger....4-123

• Floor mat anchors 4-123

• Navigation system .... 4-124

Audio system....4-125

- Antenna 4-125

• Steering wheel audio control ..... 4-126

- Bluetooth® wireless technology....4-126

• Aux, USB and iPod® 4-127

KEYS

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped on the key code tag attached to the key set. Should you

lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. After recording the key code number, remove the tag and store it in a safe place. It is recommended that you store the number in a safe place, but not in the vehicle.

Two identical key-shaped objects with metallic handles, one labeled 'Type A' and the other '38.8', shown side by side (no additional text or symbols)

Key operations

Type A

Used to start the engine, lock and unlock the doors.

Type B

To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically.

To fold the key, fold the key manually while pressing the release button.

CAUTION - Key button operation

Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may damage the key.

■ Type C

Close-up of a car key with two arrows pointing to the key (no text or symbols visible)

OXMA043316
* The actual feature may differ from the illustration.

Type C

To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release button and remove the mechanical key.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

WARNING - Aftermarket keys

Use only Kia original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.

WARNING - Ignition key (Smart key)

Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with a manual ignition key or a smart key is dangerous.

Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch or press the start button. The key would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or death. result in serious bodily injury or death.

SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)

With a smart key, you can lock or unlock a door and even start the engine without inserting the key.

The functions of the buttons on a smart key are similar to the remote keyless entry. (Refer to the "Remote keyless entry" in this section.)

Smart key functions

Carrying the smart key, you may lock and unlock the vehicle doors. Also, you may start the engine. Refer to the following, for more details.

Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow accent, no visible text or symbols on the object itself.

Locking

Pressing the button of the front outside door handles with all doors closed and any door unlocked, locks all the doors. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to indicate that all doors are locked. The button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7\~1 m (28\~40 in.) from the outside door handle. If you want to make sure that a door has locked or not, you should check the door lock button inside the vehicle or pull the outside door handle.

Even though you press the button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if any of the following occurs:

• The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the trunk (or tailgate) is opened.

Unlocking

Pressing the button of the driver's outside door handle with all doors closed and locked, unlocks the driver's door. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound twice to indicate that the driver's door is unlocked. All doors are unlocked if the button is pressed once more within 4 seconds. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound twice to indicate that all the doors are unlocked.

Pressing the button in the front passenger's outside door handle with all doors closed and locked, unlocks all the doors. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound twice to indicate that all doors are unlocked. The button will only operate when the smart key is within 28\~40 in. (0.7\~1 m) from the outside door handle.

Trunk unlocking (4 door)

The trunk will open when the trunk unlock button is pressed.

The trunk will automatically lock after it has been opened.

If the trunk is closed with the smart key in the trunk, the warning chime will sound for about 5 seconds and the trunk will not lock.

Tailgate unlocking (5 door) (if equipped)

If you are within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the outside tailgate handle, with your smart key in possession, the tailgate will unlock and open when you press the tailgate handle switch.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.

Also, once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting the key. For detailed information refer to "Starting the engine with a smart key" in section 5.

Smart key precautions

• If you lose your smart key, you will not be able to start the engine. Towing the vehicle to an authorized dealer may be necessary.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If a smart key is lost, take the vehicle and remaining key to your authorized Kia dealer for reprogramming. This will not allow the lost key from starting the vehicle and will protect from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any of following occurs:
• If the vehicle key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station it can interfere with normal operation of the smart key system
• The smart key near a mobile two-way radio system or a cellular phone.
• Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

- If the smart key is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the smart key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making calls, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Pleacing the Smart Key and cell phone in close proximity can disrupt the signals of the Smart Key

CAUTION - Transmitter

Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid as it can become damaged and not function properly.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

Remote keyless entry system operations

Lock (1)

All the doors will locked if the lock button is pressed. If all the doors (and trunk or tailgate) are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that all the doors (and trunk or tailgate) have locked.

Also, if the lock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to confirm that the door is locked.

However, if any door remains open, the hazard warning lights (and/or the chime) will not operate. But if all doors are closed after the lock button is pressed, the hazard warning lights will blink once.

Unlock (2)

The driver's door will unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once. The hazard warning lights will blink (for smart key, the chime also sounds) twice to indicate that the driver's door is unlocked.

All doors will unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds. The hazard warning lights will blink (for smart key, the chime also sounds) twice again to indicate that all doors are unlocked. After pressing this button, the doors will lock automatically unless you open any door within 30 seconds.

\*NOTICE

If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

Trunk (tailgate) open (3) (if equipped)

The trunk (tailgate) will open when the button is pressed for more than 1 second

Once the trunk (tailgate) is opened and then closed, the trunk (tailgate) will lock automatically.

Alarm (4)

The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will flash for about 30 seconds when this button is pressed for more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the horn and lights, press any button on the transmitter.

Transmitter precautions

The transmitter (or smart key) will not work if any of following occurs:

• The ignition key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The battery in the transmitter (or smart key) is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
  • The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter (or smart key) is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter (or smart key) does not work properly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter (or smart key), contact an authorized Kia dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- If the transmitter is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the transmitter could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making calls, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

\*NOTICE

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

Battery replacement

A battery should last for several years. If the transmitter or smart key is not working properly, first try replacing the battery. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

1. Pry open the transmitter or smart key center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery is positioned correctly.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

The transmitter or smart key is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter or smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION - Transmitter damage

The transmitter or smart key can malfunction if exposed to moisture, static electricity, heat or direct sunlight and from being dropped.

Close-up of a metallic key with a textured handle and circular top (no text or symbols visible)

OED036001A

Immobilizer system (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks and determines and verifies that the ignition key is valid.

If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

Your Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

\*NOTICE

Keep each key separately in order to avoid a starting malfunction.

Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch.

Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from being started.

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer damage

Do not expose your immobilizer system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This may damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer alterations

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

graph TD
    A["Armed stage"] --> B["Theft-alarm stage"]
    B --> C["Disarmed stage"]
    C --> A

This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the hazard warning lights.

Armed stage

Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below.

1. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate) and engine hood are closed and latched.
3. • Lock the doors by depressing the door lock button on the transmitter (or smart key).

The hazard warning lights will-flash once to indicate that the system is armed.

If any of the doors, tailgate or engine hood remains open, the hazard warning lights won't flash and theft-alarm will not arm. After this, if all doors, tailgate and engine hood are closed, the hazard warning lights will flash once.

- The doors can be locked by pressing the button on the front outside door handles while the smart key is in your possession. After completion of the steps above, the hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that the system is armed.

Verify the doors, hood and tailgate for being open. If they are open, close them and try locking the vehicle again. The flashing of the hazard lights will confirm the vehicle is locked and armed.

Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the vehicle. If any door (or tailgate) or engine hood is opened within 30 seconds after the system enters the armed stage, the system will be disarmed to prevent unnecessary alarm.

Theft-alarm stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the system is armed.

• A front or rear door is opened without using the transmitter (or smart key).
• The tailgate is opened without using the transmitter (or smart key).
  • The engine hood is opened.

The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously for approximately 27 seconds. To turn off the system, unlock the doors with the transmitter (or smart key).

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when:

Transmitter

• The door unlock button is pressed.
• The engine is started. (within 3 seconds)
• The ignition switch is in the "ON" position for 30 seconds or more.

Smart key

• The door unlock button is pressed.
• The button of the front outside door is pressed while carrying the smart key.
• The engine is started. (within 3 seconds)

After the doors are unlocked, the hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.

After pressing the unlock button, if any door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

Features of your vehicle

- The starter will not engage when the theft system is armed while attempting to start the vehicle.

If the system is not disarmed with the transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch, turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 30 seconds. Then the system will be disarmed.

- If you lose your keys, consult your authorized Kia dealer.

DOOR LOCKS

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle

- Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock/unlock the door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically (if equipped with power door locks).
• From the driver's door, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle once to unlock the driver's door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors (if equipped with power door locks).
• Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter key (or smart key). (if equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure the doors are closed securely.

\*NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
- If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

• To lock a door without the key, push the inside door lock button (1) or central door lock switch (2, if equipped) to the "Lock" position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors will lock automatically. (if equipped with central door lock system)

Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Unlock" position. The red mark (2) on the button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not show.

• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the front door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button will unlock and the door will open. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch (or if the smart key is in the vehicle) and any front door is opened. (if equipped)

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from outside.

With central door lock switch (if equipped)

Operate by pressing the central door lock switch.

• Press the switch to the "Lock" position (1), all vehicle doors will lock.
• Press the switch to the "Unlock" position (2), all vehicle doors will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or if the smart key is in the vehicle) and any front door is opened, the doors will not lock when the "Lock" position (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed. (if equipped)

WARNING - Doors

The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door.

WARNING

- Unattended children/animals

Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle.

An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle.

Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)

All doors will automatically unlock when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Auto door lock/unlock feature (if equipped)

- All doors will automatically lock when the transaxle shift lever is shifted out of P (Park).

- All doors will automatically unlock when the transaxle shift lever is shifted into P (Park).

An authorized Kia dealer can activate or deactivate some auto door lock/ unlock features as follows;

• Auto door unlock by using the driver's door lock button
  • Auto door lock/unlock by shifting the transaxle shift lever out of P (Park) or into P (Park)
• Auto door unlock when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch (for smart key, when the ENGINE START/STOP button is turned to the OFF position)

If you want to activate or deactivate some door lock/unlock features, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Mechanical component diagram showing a gear assembly with an inset highlighting a specific part (no text or symbols present)

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

1.Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the hole and turn it to the lock position. The child safety lock (1) is located on the rear edge of the door. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, rear door will not open even when the inner door handle is pulled.

1. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle (3).

Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle (2) until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING - Rear door locks

Use the rear door safety locks whenever children are in the vehicle. If a child accidentally opens the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, he/she can fall out.

TRUNK (4 DOOR)

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and door lock mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Opening the trunk

With the trunk lid release lever

To open the trunk from inside the vehicle, pull up the trunk lid release lever.

The trunk will automatically lock when the trunk lid closes.

\*NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

WARNING

The trunk swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the trunk.

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the trunk before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the trunk lift cylinders and attached hardware if the trunk is not closed prior to driving.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section showing a circular feature and a magnified view of a cylindrical component (no text or symbols visible)

With the key and the transmitter To open the trunk, insert the key and turn it clockwise to unlock.

Close-up of a car interior showing the hood and seatbelt, with a highlighted inset showing a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Emergency trunk lid safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk release cable located inside the trunk. If someone is inadvertently locked in the trunk, pulling this handle will release the trunk latch mechanism and open the trunk.

Closing the trunk

To close, lower the trunk lid, then press down on it until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again.

WARNING - Exhaust Fumes

The trunk lid should always be kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, exhaust gases may enter the car and serious illness or death may result.

WARNING

No one should be allowed to occupy the trunk at any time. The trunk is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

TAILGATE

Diagram of car rearview and side view showing mechanical components with highlighted parts (no text or symbols)

Opening the tailgate

■Type A

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked by turning the key to the "Lock" or "Unlock" position.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle and than pulling up the hatch.

Diagram of a car's rear bumper showing the lid and side profile, with two inset views highlighting the nose and shoulder area (no text or symbols present)

Type B

• The tailgate will locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter (or smart key) or central door lock switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle and pulling it up.
• All doors will lock if the tailgate unlock button on the smart key is pressed for more than 1 second and the tailgate is unlocked. Once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.

* There is no key hole on this type.

The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.

CAUTION - Tailgate lift cylinders

Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attaching hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.

Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid showing internal compartments (no text or symbols)

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that the tailgate is securely latched. Make sure your hands, feet and other parts of your body are safely out of the way before closing the tailgate.

CAUTION - Closing tailgate

Make sure nothing is near the tailgate latch and striker while closing the tailgate. It may damage the tailgate's latch.

WARNING - Exhaust fumes

Driving with the tailgate open is not advisable. Dangerous exhaust fumes can enter the passenger compartment.

If you must drive with the tail-gate opened, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air can enter.

WARNING - Riding in cargo area

Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. Occupants should always be properly restrained to avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops.

Technical illustration of a car interior showing internal components and a close-up view of the hood (no text or symbols)

Emergency tailgate safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, the tailgate can be opened by doing as follows:

1. Remove the cover.
   2.Push the release lever to the right.
   3.Push up the tailgate.

WINDOWS

(1) Driver's door power window switch*
(2) Front passenger's door power window switch*
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch*
(4) Rear door (right) power window switch*
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window down*
(7) Power window lock button*

*: if equipped

In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate. Each door has a power window switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows.

The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the front doors are opened, the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period.

NOTICE

While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in an open (or partially open) position, your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing (if equipped)

The driver's door has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.

To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).

Auto down window (if equipped) (Driver's window)

Pressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the driver's window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, momentarily pull up the switch to the opposite direction of the window movement.

OTA040015 OUN026013

Auto up/down window (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press and release the switch to the opposite direction of the movement.

If the power window is not operated correctly, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the window and continue pulling up on the driver's power window switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.

Interior view of a car with a teddy bear and a yellow arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols)

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement. The window will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).

And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.

The automatic reverse feature for the driver's window is only active when the "auto up" feature is used by fully pulling up the switch. The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.

WARNING

Always check for obstructions before raising any window to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. If an object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse direction.

Close-up of a car dashboard with control buttons and a rotary dial (no text or symbols visible)

Power window lock button (if equipped)

The driver can disable the power window switches on the front and rear passengers' doors by pressing the power window lock switch to the lock position.

When the power window lock switch is pressed, the driver's master control cannot operate the front and rear passengers' power windows.

CAUTION - Opening / closing Window

To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

WARNING - Power windows

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the power window lock switch (on the driver's door) in the LOCK position.

Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.

Features of your vehicle

Mechanical joint diagram with yellow directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Manual windows (if equipped)

To raise or lower the window, turn the window regulator handle clockwise or counterclockwise.

When closing the windows, make sure your passenger's arms, hands and body are safely out of the way.

HOOD

Interior view of a car showing the side door, seatbelt, and dashboard handle (no text or symbols visible)

1. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).

Close-up of a mechanical component with a dotted circular annotation highlighting a detail (no readable text or symbols)

1. Pull out the support rod from the hood.
   4.Hold the hood opened with the support rod.

Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

Open the hood after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transaxle and to the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for manual transaxle, and setting the parking brake.

WARNING - Hot parts

Grasp the support rod in the area wrapped in rubber. The plastic will help prevent you from being burned by hot metal when the engine is hot.

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the following:
2. All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly installed.
3. Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.
4. Return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.
5. Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft. (30 cm) above the closed position and let it drop. Make sure that it locks into place.

WARNING - Fire risk

Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.

⚠ WARNING - Unsecured engine hood

Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could fly open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.

FUEL FILLER LID

Interior view of a car showing the door, seatbelt, and dashboard with a yellow directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel filler lid opener.

If the fuel filler lid does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing two rotating components with yellow directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel filler lid opener up.

3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).

4. To remove the cap (2), turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until it "clicks" one time. This indicates that the cap is securely one time tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in lightly and make sure that it is securely closed.

WARNING - Refueling

Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.

If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and subject you to the risk of fire and burns.

\*NOTICE

Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, otherwise the fuel cap open warning indicator light will illuminate.

Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

WARNING - Fire/explosion risk

Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station facility. Failure to follow all warnings will result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death due to fire or explosion.

WARNING - Static electricity

• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.

WARNING

- Portable fuel container

When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete. Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

WARNING - Cell phone fires

Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

WARNING - Refueling& Vehicle fires

When refueling, always shut the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before starting the engine.

WARNING - Smoking

DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.

Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested in section 1.

If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

CAUTION - Exterior paint

Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit with two vent slots and a central control panel (no text or symbols visible)

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the sun-roof, periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail.

In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freezing conditions. After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

CAUTION - Sunroof control lever

Do not continue to press the sun-roof control lever after the sun-roof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an open or slide position.

WARNING - Sunroof operation

When closing the sunroof, make sure there are no body parts in the movement range of the sliding roof. Parts of the body could become trapped or crushed.

Interior view of a car showing a ceiling-mounted fan and a circular vent with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Sliding the sunroof

To open the sunroof, pull the sunroof control lever backward.

To close the sunroof, push the sun-roof control lever forward.

To open the sunroof automatically:

Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the second detent position and then release it. The sunroof will slide all the way open.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

To close the sunroof automatically:

Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position and then release it. The sunroof will automatically close all the way.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

While driving with the sunroof in an open (or partially open position), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening

Illustration of a transparent smartphone with a cartoon bear and yellow arrow pointing to it, against a cloudy sky background (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car air intake console with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

Tilting the sunroof

To open the sunroof, push the sun-roof control lever upward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

To close the sunroof, push the sun-roof lever forward or pull downward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

WARNING - Sunroof operation

When closing the sunroof, make sure there are no body parts in the movement range of the sliding roof. Parts of the body could become trapped or crushed.

Do not extend the face, neck, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.

With the sunroof open for an extended period of time, dirt may accumulate on the guide rails causing noise during opening and closing. Periodically remove dirt using a clean cloth.

CAUTION - Sunroof motor damage

If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.

Close-up of a transparent computer mouse with cloud reflections and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Sunshade

When opening the sunroof, the sunshade will also open. Once the sunroof is closed, the sunshade can be manually closed.

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is blown, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and close the sunroof completely.
2. Release the control lever.
3. Push and hold the control lever forward (for more than 10 seconds) until the sunroof tilts and slightly moves. Then, release the lever.
4. Within 3 seconds, push and hold the control lever forward (for more than 5 seconds) until the sunroof is operated as follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the control lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof system is reset.

* For more detailed information, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

\*NOTICE

If the sunroof is not reset when the vehicle battery is disconnected, discharged, or related fuse is blown, the sunroof may not operate properly.

STEERING WHEEL

Electric power steering

Power steering uses a motor to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

The motor driven power steering is controlled by the power steering control unit which senses the steering wheel torque and vehicle speed to command the motor.

The steering wheel becomes heavier as the vehicle's speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle's speed decreases for better control of the steering wheel.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

- The steering effort is high immediately after turning the ignition switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics is completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

- A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is turned to the ON or LOCK position.

- Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

- The steering effort increases if the steering wheel is rotated continuously when the vehicle is not in motion. However, after a few minutes, it will return to its normal conditions.

- When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise could occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate abnormally. Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Tilt and telescoping (if equipped) steering

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

WARNING - Steering wheel adjustment

Never adjust the angle and height of the steering wheel while driving. You may lose steering control

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted air vent and hand icon (no text or symbols)

To change the steering wheel angle, pull down the lock release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (if equipped) (3), then pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

Heated steering wheel (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, pressing the heated steering wheel button warms the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the steering wheel off, press the button once again. The indicator on the button will turn off.

It will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on.

If the ignition is turned off and then on again within a half hour (while the heated steering wheel button is pressed), the steering wheel heating system will remain on.

CAUTION

• Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This causes damage to the heated steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated steering wheel, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the steering wheel.
• If the surface of steering wheel is damaged by sharp object, damage to the heated steering wheel components could occur.

Close-up of a car steering wheel with a yellow directional arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

OUB041031

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel. Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

MIRRORS

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen. Make this adjustment before you start driving.

Do not place objects in the rear seat which would interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING - Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control.

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust the mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch (if equipped). The mirror heads can be folded to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street.

The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

CAUTION - Rearview mirror

Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water.

WARNING - Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control.

Remote control

Electric type

The electric remote control mirror switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror the ignition switch should be in the ACC or ON position.

Move the lever (1) to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

After the adjustment, put the lever into neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION - Outside mirror

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.
- Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand. Doing so may damage the related parts.

Close-up of a car's side panel with control buttons and a yellow arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Electric Type (if equipped)

To fold the outside rearview mirror, depress the button.

To unfold it, depress the button again.

CAUTION - Electric type outside rearview mirror

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the ignition switch is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running. In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don't fold it by hand. It could cause motor failure.

Close-up of a car's side mirror with a yellow curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

OUB041035OUB041034

Manual type

To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Fuel gauge
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge
6. Warning and indicator lights
7. Shift position indicator (A/T) or Manual transaxle shift indicator (M/T)
8. Odometer/Trip computer
   * The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more details refer to the "Gauges" in the next pages.

OUB044036N/OUB042037N

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel showing battery and lightbulb (no text or symbols)

Instrument panel illumination

When the vehicle's parking lights or headlights are on, push upward or downward the illumination control knob to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

The brightness of the instrument panel (Type B) illumination can be adjusted by rotating the control knob when the ignition switch is in ON position.

Gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in miles per hour and/or kilometers per hour.

OUB041045NOUB041038

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position with the engine OFF. This movement is normal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running.

CAUTION - Red zone

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.

Close-up of a mechanical gauge or dial with two adjustment knobs and a central knob (no visible text or symbols)

OUB042048N

Engine coolant temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the engine overheats" in section 6.

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the "H" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

Close-up of a mechanical dial with labeled ports (F, H) and a valve, no readable text or symbols beyond labels

OUB042047N

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in section 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the E level. Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

CAUTION - Low fuel

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Odometer

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

\*NOTICE

It is against the law to alter the odometer on all vehicles with the intent to change the mileage registered on the odometer.

Trip computer (Tripmeter) (if equipped)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving, when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

All stored driving information (except distance to empty and instant fuel consumption) will reset if the battery is disconnected.

graph TD
    A["TRIP A"] --> B["TRIP B"]
    B --> C["Distance to empty"]
    C --> D["Average fuel consumption"]
    D --> E["Instant fuel consumption"]
    E --> F["Average speed"]
    F --> G["Elapsed time"]
    G --> H["Outside temperature"]

graph TD
    A["TRIP A"] --> B["TRIP B"]
    B --> C["Distance to empty"]
    C --> D["Average fuel consumption"]
    D --> E["Instant fuel consumption"]
    E --> F["Average speed"]
    F --> G["Elapsed time"]
    G --> A

Tripmeter

TRIP A: Tripmeter A

TRIP B: Tripmeter B

This mode indicates the distance of individual trips selected since the last tripmeter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to 999.9 miles (0.0 to 999.9 km).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

Distance to empty

This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the current fuel in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel delivered to the engine. When the remaining distance is below 1 miles (1 km), “---” will be displayed and the distance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter's working range is from 1 to 990 miles (1 to 999 km).

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the "Distance to empty" function may not operate correctly.
  The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
  • The fuel consumption and distance to empty values may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance. This value may differ from the actual driving distance available.

Average fuel consumption

This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last average consumption reset. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input. For an accurate calculation, drive more than 0.03 mile (50 m).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second, when the average fuel consumption is displayed, clears the average fuel consumption to zero (---).

If the vehicle speed exceeds 0.6 MPH (1 km/h) after refueled more than 6 l, the average fuel consumption will be cleared to zero (---).

Instant fuel consumption

This mode calculates the instant fuel consumption during the last few seconds.

NOTICE

You must drive more than 6 MPH (10 km/h) (type A) or 3 MPH (5 km/h) (type B) for this mode to calculate the instant fuel consumption.

Average speed

This mode calculates the average speed of the vehicle since the last average speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the average speed keeps going while the engine is running.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second, when the average speed is displayed, clears the average speed to zero (---).

Elapsed time

This mode indicates the total time traveled since the last elapsed time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the elapsed time keeps going while the engine is running.

The meter's working range is from 0:00\~99:59.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second, when the elapsed time is being displayed, clears the elapsed time to zero (0:00).

Outside temperature (if equipped)

This mode indicates the outside temperature around the vehicle.

The meter's working range is from -40°C to 60°C (-40°F to 140°F).

Type A

To change the outside temperature display unit (°C ↔ °F), press the RESET button more than 1 second in this mode.

Type B

To Change the outside temperature display unit (°C ↔ °F), see the following pages in Vehicle Option section.

Manual transaxle shift indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you which gear is desired while driving to save fuel.

For example

▲3: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
▼3: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

Automatic transaxle shift position indicator (if equipped)

The indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.

Illumination intensity

The illumination intensity of the instrument panel is shown when adjusting it with the illumination control switch.

For more details, refer to "Instrument panel illumination" in section 4.

User Settings (only for Type B cluster, if equipped)

1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position or engine running.
2. Press the TRIP button until the User setting is displayed.
3. With the User setting displayed, press the TRIP button for 2 seconds.
4. You can change the item by pressing the TRIP button and select an item by pressing the RESET button.

OUB041064 OUB041065 OUB041066

Car option (only for Type B cluster, if equipped)

1. When the vehicle is at a standstill, pressing the TRIP button for more than 2 seconds with the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ON position or engine running, the LCD display on the cluster will change to the "User Setting" mode. You can move to items by pressing the TRIP button and select the item by pressing the RESET button.
2. In the "User Setting" mode, select "Vehicle Option".
3. Move (TRIP button) to the desired item and select (RESET button).

Align steering wheel (Steering position) (if equipped)

On - The warning illuminates on the LCD display when the steering wheel is not aligned with the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ON position.
Off - The warning does not illuminate on the LCD display when the steering wheel is not aligned with the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ON position.

Outside temperature unit (if equipped)

You can exchange the outside temperature unit ^irc C ↔ ^irc F.

Language

Choose a language you prefer within the LCD display.

Maintenance system (only for Type B cluster, if equipped)

The Maintenance system informs the driver when to replace engine oil and rotate tires.

Maintenance

1. When the vehicle is at a standstill, pressing the TRIP button for more than 2 seconds with the ENGINE START/ STOP button in the ON position or engine running, the LCD display on the cluster will change to the "User Setting" mode. You can move to the items by pressing the TRIP button and select the item by pressing the RESET button.
2. In the "User Setting" mode select "Maintenance".

Maintenance schedule

1. Select the desired engine oil (tire rotation) maintenance schedule.
2. If finished, you can come out of the Maintenance mode by pressing the TRIP button for more than 2 seconds.

Engine Oil(Tire Rotation) Service Required

1. If service is required, the message will be displayed.

1. If you would like to reset or inactivate the maintenance system press the RESET button for more than 1 second. The display will change to "Engine Oil Service Message" mode.

You can move to items by pressing the TRIP button and select the desired item by pressing the RESET button.

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). Any light that does not illuminate should be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

After starting the engine, check to make sure that all warning lights are off. If any warning lights are still on, this indicates a situation that needs attention. When releasing the parking brake, the brake system warning light should go off. The fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel level is low.

Air bag warning light

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light (if equipped)

This warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

This light also comes on when the Supplement Restraint System (SRS) is not working properly. If the air bag warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

This warning light illuminates if the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, this indicates that the ABS may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible. The normal braking system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.

Electronic brake force distribution (EBD) system warning light

If these two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving, your vehicle's ABS and EBD system may have malfunctioned.

In this case, your ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING - ABS/brake lights

If both ABS and Brake warning lights are on and stay on, your vehicle's brake system will not work normally during sudden braking. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

If the ABS warning light or EBD warning light is on and stays on, the speedometer or odometer/tripmeter may not work. In this case, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON, regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned on, the seat belt warning light and the seat belt warning chime will operate for approximately 6 seconds. But if the belts is rest fastened within the 6 seconds, the warning chime will turn off and the warning light will blink for the remainder of the 6 second period.

If the driver's seat belt is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds. But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will turn off immediately. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the seat belt warning light and chime will operate approximately 11 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds off until the belt is fastened or the vehicle speed decreases below 3 mph (5 km/h).

Turn signal indicator

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink, blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate at all, it indicates a malfunction in the turn signal system. You should consult your dealer for repairs.

This indicator also blinks when the hazard warning switch is turned on.

The indicator illuminates when the front fog lights ON.

Tail light indicator

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

This indicator illuminates when the tail lights are on.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oil pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates while driving:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine oil level. If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, call an authorized Kia dealer.

The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on, then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, there is a serious malfunction.

Parking brake & brake fluid warning light

Parking brake warning

This warning light illuminates for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and then it will go out.

Also, this light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. The warning light should go out when the parking brake is released.

CAUTION - Engine damage

If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated and stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required. Then check all brake components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are found, the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly. Have the vehicle towed to any authorized Kia dealer for a brake system inspection and necessary repairs.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working. If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. To check bulb operation, check whether the parking brake and brake fluid warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Charging system warning light

This warning light indicates a malfunction of either the generator or electrical charging system.

If the warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical charging system. Have an authorized Kia dealer correct the problem as soon as possible.

Trunk lid (or tailgate) open warning light

Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates when the trunk lid (or tailgate) is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when a door is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.

If any of the following occurs in a vehicle equipped with the smart key, the immobilizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goes off.

- When the smart key is in the vehicle, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC or ON position, the indicator will illuminate for a few minutes to indicate that you are able to start the engine. However, when the smart key is not in the vehicle, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the indicator will blink for a few minutes to indicate that you are not able to start the engine.

- When the ENGINE START/STOP button changes to the ON position from the ACC position without the smart key in the vehicle, the indicator blinks for a few minutes to indicate that you are not able to start the engine.

- When the battery is weak, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the indicator will blink and you are not able to start the engine. However, you are able to start the engine by inserting the smart key in the smart key holder. If the smart key system related parts have a problem, the indicator will blink.

Low fuel level warning light

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (check engine light)

This warning light indicates the fuel tank is nearly empty. When it comes on, you should add fuel as soon as possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).

This indicator is part of the Engine Control System which monitors various emission control system components. If this indicator illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential malfunction has been detected somewhere in the emission control system.

This indicator will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will go off in a few seconds after the engine is started. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, take your vehicle to the nearest authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be drivable, but have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer promptly.

CAUTION - MIL illumination

- Prolonged driving with the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.

- If the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage. This could result in loss of engine power. Have the Engine Control System inspected as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

ESC indicator (Electronic Stability Control)

ESC OFF indicator

Low tire pressure telltale

The ESC indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. When the ESC is on, it monitors the driving conditions under normal driving conditions, the ESC light will remain off. When a slippery or low traction condition is encountered, the ESC will operate, and the ESC indicator will blink to indicate the ESC is operating.

If the ESC indicator stays on, the ESC may have a malfunction. Take your car to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode, press the ESC OFF button. The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate indicating the ESC is deactivated.

The low tire pressure telltale comes on for 3 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position.

If the warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after coming on for about 3 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the "ON" position, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an Kia authorized dealer as soon as possible.

This warning light will also illuminate if one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. If the warning light illuminates while driving, reduce vehicle speed immediately and stop the vehicle.

Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting at the steering wheel. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard.

WARNING - Low tire pressure

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on tires with low pressure will cause the tires to overheat and fail.

Cruise indicator (if equipped) CRUISE indicator

CRUISE

The indicator illuminates when the cruise control system is enabled.

The cruise indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON/OFF button on the steering wheel is pushed.

The indicator goes off when the cruise control ON/OFF button is pushed again. For more Information, refer to "Cruise control system" in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

SET

The indicator illuminates when the cruise function switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.

The cruise SET indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates when the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed.

The cruise SET indicator does not illuminate when the cruise control switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the system is disengaged.

Key reminder warning chime (if equipped)

If the driver's door is opened while the ignition key is left in the ignition switch (ACC or LOCK position), the key reminder warning chime will sound. This is to prevent you from locking your keys in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the key is removed from the ignition switch or the driver's door is closed.

Electric power steering (EPS) system warning light (if equipped)

ECOMINDER® indicator (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates after the ignition key is turned to the ON position and then it will go off when the engine starts.

This light also comes on when the EPS has malfunctioned. If it comes on while driving, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Fuel cap open warning indicator

This warning light indicates the fuel filler cap is not tighten securely.

Always make sure that the fuel filler cap is tight.

The ECOMINDER® indicator is displayed to help you improve fuel efficiency when you are driving.

- The ECOMINDER® indicator will turn the ECO light green on the instrument panel when you are driving efficiently in the ECO ON mode.

If you don't want the indicator displayed, you can turn the ECO ON mode to OFF mode by pressing the TRIP button.

- When the instant fuel consumption mode(if equipped) is displayed on the LCD display or the system is not working properly, the indicator turns off. If the indicator turns off when the instant fuel consumption mode or ECO OFF mode is not selected, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

• Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's driving habit and road condition.
• The system stops operating when the transaxle is in the P (Park), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) position or sports mode, or when the instant fuel consumption mode is selected.

WARNING - ECOMINDER® indicator

Don't keep watching the "ECO" ECOMINDER® indicator while driving. It may distract you while driving and cause an accident.

Auto stop indicator (if equipped)

This indicator will illuminate when the engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.

When the automatic starting occurs, the auto stop indicator on the cluster will blink for 5 seconds.

For more details, refer to the ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system in chapter 5.

NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by the ISG system, some warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, ESC or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds.

This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean the system is malfunctioning.

LCD display warning (if equipped)

- For vehicle's equipped with smart key system

Key is not in vehicle

If the smart key is not in the vehicle and if any door is opened or closed with the engine start/stop button in the ACC, ON, or START position, the warning illuminates on the LCD display. Also, the chime sounds for 5 seconds when the smart key is not in the vehicle and the door is closed.

Always have the smart key with you.

Key is not detected

If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is not detected and you press the engine start/stop button, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for 10 seconds. Also, the immobilizer indicator blinks for 10 seconds.

Press start with smart key

If you press the engine start/stop button while the warning "Key is not detected" is illuminated, the warning "Press the start button with smart key" illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also, the immobilizer indicator blinks for 10 seconds.

- For vehicle's equipped with smart key system

Low key battery

OUB043076

If the engine start/stop button changes to the OFF position when the smart key in the vehicle discharges, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds. Also, the warning chime sounds once.

Replace the battery with a new one.

Press brake pedal to start engine (for automatic transaxle)

OUB041077 OUB041078

If the engine start/stop button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine.

Press clutch pedal to start engine (for manual transaxle)

If the engine start/stop button turns to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should depress the clutch pedal to start the engine.

- For vehicle's equipped with smart key system

Shift to "P" position (for automatic transaxle)

If you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the engine start/stop button will turn to the ACC position. If the button is pressed once more it will turn to the ON position. The warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should press the engine start/stop button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position to turn off the engine.

Also, the warning chime sounds for about 10 seconds. (if equipped)

Press start button again

If you can not operate the engine start/stop button when there is a problem with the engine start/stop button system, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds and the chime sounds continuously to indicate that you could start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button once more.

The chime will stop if the engine start/stop button system works normally or the theft alarm system is armed.

If the warning illuminates each time you press the engine start/stop button, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine (for automatic transaxle)

If you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral) position, the warning illuminates for about 10 seconds on the LCD display.

You can also start the engine with the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but for your safety start the engine with the shift lever in the P(Park) position.

Press start button while turn steering

If the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the engine start/stop button is pressed, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also, the warning chime sounds once and the engine start/stop button light blinks for 10 seconds.

When you are warned, press the engine start/stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left.

Check steering wheel lock system

If the steering wheel does not lock normally when the engine start/stop button changes to the OFF position, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also, the warning chime sounds for 3 seconds and the engine start/stop button light blinks for 10 seconds.

Check stop lamp fuse (if equipped)

When the stop lamp fuse is disconnected, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display.

Replace the fuse with a new one. If that is not possible you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button for 10 seconds in ACC.

Door open! (if equipped)

It displays the corresponding door or tailgate that is not closed securely.

Fuel cap open warning (if equipped)

This warning light indicates the fuel filler cap is not tight securely. Always make sure that the fuel filler cap is tight.

Align steering wheel (if equipped)

If you start the engine when the steering wheel is turned 90 degrees to the left after a couple of seconds, "Align steering wheel" illuminates on the LCD display for 5 seconds.
Turn the steering wheel to the right and make it turned to the left less than 30 degrees.

Align steering wheel (if equipped)

OUB041089 OUB043210

Low tire pressure (if equipped)

If you start the engine when the steering wheel is turned 90 degrees to the right after a couple of seconds, "Align steering wheel" illuminates on the LCD display for 5 seconds.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and make it turned to the right less than 30 degrees.

This warning message will illuminate when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

REAR-CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)

Technical illustration of a car rear bumper and internal gear shift (no text or symbols)

The Rear-Camera Display will activate when the back-up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental system that displays a veiw from behind the vehicle through the UVO audio or navigation display while backing-up.

Always keep the camera lens clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally.

WARNING - Rear Camera Display

The rear view camera is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle, nor is it a substitute for proper and safe backing-up procedures. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle. Objects can be much closer than they appear in the display screen and can be distorted in both size and proportion. The Rear-Camera Display may not display every object behind the vehicle.

WARNING - Backing & using camera

Never rely solely on the rear view camera when backing. You must always use methods of viewing the area behind you including looking over both shoulders as well as continuously checking all three rear view mirrors. Due to the difficulty of ensuring that the area behind you remains clear, always back slowly and stop immediately if you even suspect that a person, and especially a child, might be behind you.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER LIGHTING

The hazard warning flasher should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the car in a hazardous location. When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. Both turn signal lights will blink. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the switch again.

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the parking lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following :

1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Close-up of a hand holding a handheld device with control buttons and a yellow rotation arrow (no text or symbols visible)

OAM049041 OAM049042 OFS040084

Parking light position (30)

When the light switch is in the parking light position (1st position), the tail, position, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the head-light position (2nd position) the head, tail, position, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights.

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO light position, the taillights and headlights will turn ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

Never place anything over sensor (1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better auto-light system control.

Don't clean the sensor using a window cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights, push the lever away from you. Pull it back for low beams.

The high-beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.

WARNING - High beams Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the normal (low-beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.

Turn signals and lane change signals

The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

One-touch lane change function (if equipped)

To activate an one-touch lane change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3 times.

\*NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

OAM049046NOAM04904

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch (1) is turned to the on position after the headlights are turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch (1) to the off position.

When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Front Rear (if equipped) (5 door)

A : Wiper speed control (front)

· HI – High wiper speed
· LO - Low wiper speed
- INT – Intermittent wipe AUTO* – Automatic control wipe
- OFF - Off
· MIST – Single wipe

B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*

· ON – Continuous wipe

- INT - Intermittent wipe

· OFF - Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

*: if equipped

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.

MIST: For a single wiping cycle, move the lever upward and release it. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in a light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob.

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

AUTO (Automatic) control (if equipped)

The rain sensor located on the upper end of the windshield glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the wiper operates. When the rain stops, the wiper stops.

To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system. Set the wiper to off position when the wiper is not in use.

Always remove all snow and ice and defrost the windshield properly prior to operating the windshield wipers.

\*NOTICE - Sensor cover

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass as this may damage the sensor system.

\*NOTICE - Winter driving

Always set the auto wiper switch to the off position in the winter to avoid auto activation during icy conditions which may damage the windshield wipers.

CAUTION - Wiper position

When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the off position to stop the auto wiper operation.

The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode while washing the vehicle.

Windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles.

Use this function when the wind-shield is dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level.

If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side.

CAUTION - Washer pump

To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

WARNING - Obscured visibility

Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.

CAUTION - Wipers & windshields

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
- To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
- To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

Close-up of a hand holding a camera lens with adjustment knob (no text or symbols visible)

OAM049103N OXM049125

Rear window wiper and washer switch (5 door)

The rear window wiper and washer switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to the desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer.

ON - Normal wiper operation

INT - Intermittent wiper operation (if equipped)

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you to spray rear washer fluid and to run the rear wipers 1\~3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

INTERIOR LIGHT

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

WARNING - Interior light

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. The glare from the interior lights may obstruct your view and cause an accident.

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit with two vent slots and a door (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a metallic door with a small internal component and two yellow arrows pointing to it, no visible text or symbols.

Map lamp (if equipped)

1. Push the lens to turn the light on or off.

2.DOOR: The light comes on or goes off when a door is opened or closed.

3.OFF (Door switch is not pressed): The light stays off at all times even when a door is opened.

When the light is turned on with the lens pressed, the light is not turned off even with the switch in the OFF position.

Room lamp

1.ON : The light stays on at all times.

2.DOOR : The light comes on or off when a door is opened or closed.

3.OFF: The light stays off at all times even when a door is opened.

Do not leave the switch in the ON position for an extended period of time when the vehicle is not running.

The luggage room lamp comes on when the trunk (tailgate) is opened.

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the trunk (tailgate) securely after using the luggage room.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest door and side panel with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Push the switch to turn the light on or off.

• The lamp will turn on if this button is pressed.
- ⓄThe lamp will turn off if this button is pressed.

Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or damage the sunvisor.

Interior view of a car showing the intake manifold and side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Glove box lamp

The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened.

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the glove box securely after using the glove box.

DEFROSTER

CAUTION - Conductors

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging" in this section.

OUB045101

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window, while the engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster manually, press the rear window defroster button again.

Outside mirror defroster (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Recirculated air position button
7. Outside fresh air position button

OUB045103L

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
   To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling :

- Heating: √

- Cooling:

1. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air or recirculated air position.
3. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
4. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

Circular black button with white icons and a yellow curved arrow, no text or symbols present.

OUB041105

Mode selection

The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Six symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Close-up of a kitchen air conditioner panel with three rotary buttons and a yellow indicator (no text or symbols visible)

MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster. In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumb-wheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right for warm air or left for cooler air.

Close-up of a wall-mounted air conditioner unit with three cooling fans and two yellow arrows pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the button illuminates when the recirculated air position is selected.

With the recirculated air position selected, air from passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the button will not illuminate when the outside (fresh) air position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged operation of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING - Recirculated air

Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

WARNING - Reduced visibility

Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

OUB045110

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Close-up of a black circular dial with yellow arrow and flower symbol, no readable text or numbers

OUB045208L

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan speed control knob to the "0" position.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.
6. If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the position.

Operation Tips

• To prevent dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. However, prolonged operation of the reticulated air position will excessively dry the air. In this case, change the air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.
5. When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position, set the mode control to the MAX A/C position, then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

CAUTION - Excessive AC

While using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating and potential engine damage. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

\*NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule.
  If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - AC Repair

The oil and refrigerant in your vehicle's air conditioning system is under very high pressure. If proper service procedures are not followed an explosion may result. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

CAUTION - AC Repair

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Climate control display
4. Fan speed control knob
5. OFF button
6. Front windshield defroster button
7. Rear window defroster button
8. Mode selection button
9. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
10. Air intake control button

CAUTION

Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. It is best to operate the blower when the engine is running.

OUB045120N

OUB045121 OUB045126

Automatic heating and air conditioning

1. Push the AUTO button. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically according to the temperature setting.

1. Set the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

\*NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off, select any button or switch of the following:

• Mode selection button
• Air conditioning button
• Front windshield defroster button
• Air intake control button
• Fan speed control knob

The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

- For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 23°C (73°F).

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow downward arrow and label 'OUN026312' (no readable text or symbols on the object itself)

\*NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button (or turning any knob) except the AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling:

• Heating: √

• Cooling:

• Set the temperature control to the desired position.

• Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
• Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
• If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

Close-up of a mechanical control panel with no visible text or symbols on the main body, featuring a yellow arrow pointing to one section (no readable text or symbols)

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:

Refer to the illustration in the "Manual climate control system".

Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Defrost mode

When you select the defrost mode, the following system settings will be made automatically:

• The air conditioning system will be turned on.
• The outside(fresh) air position will be selected.
  • The fan speed will be set to the high speed.

To turn the defrost mode off, press the mode button or defrost button again or AUTO button.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Instrument panel vents

The outlet port can be opened or closed separately using the horizontal thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it downward to the maximum position. To open the vent, rotate it upward to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the right extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the left extremely.

When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by 0.5^irc C/1°F. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

Temperature conversion

You can switch the temperature mode between Centigrade and Fahrenheit as follows:

While pressing the OFF button, press the

AUTO button for 4 seconds or more.

The display will change from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to Centigrade.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade.

Close-up of a car air conditioner panel with control buttons and a yellow upward arrow (no readable text or symbols)

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

\*NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING - Reduced visibility

Continued use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

WARNING - Sleeping with AC on

Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on as this may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

WARNING - Recirculated air

Continued use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

OUB045130

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by operating the fan speed control knob.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

Close-up of a metallic air conditioner control panel with a yellow arrow pointing to the right side (no visible text or symbols)

Air conditioning (A/C)

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).

Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

OUB045132OUB045131

OFF mode

Press the OFF button to turn off the air climate control system. However, you can still operate the air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.
6. If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
  • Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.
5. When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position, then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

CAUTION

• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
  • To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed.

Climate control air filter (if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

\*NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule.
  If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Improper service may cause serious injury to the person performing the service.

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windshield heating

Do not use the ω_position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to a lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except "0" position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the tor position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control sys- tem

To defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( )
4. The air conditioning will be turned on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( )
4. The air conditioning will be turned on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

Defogging logic

To reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such as position. To cancel or return to the defogging logic, do the followings.

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the defrost position (☐)
3. Push the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
   The indicator light in the air intake control button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

The A/C display blinks 3 times. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it is reset to the defog logic status.

Automatic climate control system (if equipped)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select the defrost position pressing defrost button ( )
3. While holding the air conditioning button (A/C) pressed, press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

Close-up of a car's front window with a dotted circular mark highlighting the center (no text or symbols visible)

Auto defogging system (Only for automatic climate control system, if equipped)

Auto defogging reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield by

automatically sensing the moisture of inside the windshield.

The auto defogging system operates when the AUTO mode is on.

This indicator illuminates when the auto defogging system senses the moisture of inside the windshield and operates.

If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher steps operate as follow.

Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning

Step 2 : Outside air position

Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the windshield

Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the windshield

If your vehicle is equipped with the auto defogging system, it is automatically activated when the conditions are met. However, if you would like to cancel the auto defogging system, press the front defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds while pressing the AUTO button. The indicator will blink 3 times to notify you that the system is cancelled. To use the auto defogging system again, follow the procedures mentioned above.

If the battery has been disconnected or discharged, it resets to the auto defogging status.

\*NOTICE

If the A/C off is manually selected while the auto defogging system is on, the auto defogging indicator will blink 3 times to give notice that the A/C off can not be selected.

CAUTION

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the driver side windshield glass. Damage to the system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

These compartments can be used to store small items.

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.

Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover can not close securely.

WARNING - Flammable materials

Do not store, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

Close-up of a car interior component with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific area, no visible text or symbols.

Center console storage (if equipped)

To open the center console storage, pull up the lever.

Close-up of a car interior showing a highlighted yellow object and a magnified view of the interior (no text or symbols)

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handle and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use.

Always keep the glove box closed while the vehicle is in operation.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing airflow direction and control buttons (no text or symbols on main components)

Cool box (if equipped)

You can keep beverage cans or other items cool in the glove box.

1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever of the vent installed in the glove box to the open position.
3. When the cool box is not used, slide the lever to the closed position.

If some items in the cool box block the vent, the cooling effectiveness of the coolbox is reduced.

\*NOTICE

Do not put perishable food in the cool box because it may not maintain the necessary consistent temperature to keep the food fresh.

\*NOTICE

If the temperature control knob is in the warm or hot position, warm or hot air will flow into the glove box.

Interior view of a vehicle showing two compartments with 4-door and 5-door door placements, labeled OUB041206K and OUB041147 (no text or symbols on the main image area)

Luggage net holder (if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the cargo area, you can use the 4 holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net.

If necessary, contact your authorized Kia dealer to obtain a luggage net.

To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING - Luggage net

Always keep your face and body out of the luggage net recoil path and avoid using the luggage net when the straps have visible signs of wear or damage. The luggage net can snap and cause injuries.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted inset showing a yellow arrow indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols present)

Luggage tray (5 door) (if equipped)

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy access.

1. Grasp the handle on the top of the cover and lift it.
2. Fold the rear part of luggage tray board frontward.
3. Lift up luggage tray board front-ward (Luggage tray board stand itself)

Interior view of a mechanical or electronic device with a yellow arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

Increase cargo space (if equipped)

If you want to increase cargo space,

1. Grasp the handle on the top of the cover and lift it
2. Fold the rear part of the luggage tray board frontward
3. Lift the luggage tray board hinge and pull it to the end of sliding slot.
4. Rotate it downward and slide it frontward (refer to the above pictures)

INTERIOR FEATURES

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a yellow directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the lever itself)

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way into its socket. When the element is heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.

If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter, use only a genuine Kia replacement or its approved equivalent.

• Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.

CAUTION - Cigarette lighter

Do not insert accessories into the cigarette lighter socket. Doing so can damage the lighter socket

Mechanical gear shift lever mechanism with no visible text or symbols

Ashtray (if equipped)

To use the ashtray, open the cover. To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.

WARNING - Ashtray use

Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

Cup holder

WARNING - Hot liquids

Do not place uncovered cups of hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you may burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not place uncovered cups in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the liquid spills, electric systems may malfunction.

\*NOTICE

When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.

Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

Interior view of a car dashboard with two yellow directional arrows pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols visible)

Sliding armrest (if equipped)

To move forward

Grab the front portion of the armrest (1) then pull it forward

To move rearward

Push the armrest rearward with your palm.

OVG049174OUB041172

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows.

To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and slide the mirror cover (4).

The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket.

CAUTION - Vanity mirror lamp

If you use the vanity mirror lamp, turn off the lamp before return the sunvisor to its original position. It could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.

Mechanical gear shift lever with 12V speed limit dial and control buttons (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.

Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A in electric capacity.

Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

Close the cover when not in use.

Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle's power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

WARNING - Electric shock

Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet and do not touch with a wet hand. You may get an electric shock.

Exterior view of a car showing engine compartment with a highlighted sensor or sensor component (no text or symbols visible)

Shopping bag holder (5 door)

- Do not hang a bag weighing more than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause damage to the shopping bag holder.

- Do not hang the frail objects when you drive rough road, the objects may be damaged.

Digital clock and calendar (if equipped)

Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must reset the clock and the calendar.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the clock buttons operate as follows:

Setup the clock and calender With audio off

1. Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button (1) until the clock of the display blinks.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob (2) and press it.

With audio on

1. Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button (1) until the clock adjust mode displayed.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob (2) and press it.

WARNING - Clock Setting Distraction

Do not adjust the clock while driving. Such adjustments may distract you for too long from the roadway and lead to a collision.

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with a yellow highlight on its side (no text or symbols visible)

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

To use the hanger, pull down the upper portion of hanger.

CAUTION - Hanging clothing

Do not hang heavy clothes, since those may damage the hook.

For driver's side For passenger's side

Two grayscale images showing a mechanical component with a highlighted square feature, no visible text or symbols.

Floor mat anchor(s)

When using a floor mat on the floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.

WARNING - After market floor mat

Do not install aftermarket floor mats that are not capable of being securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors. Unsecured floor mats can interfere with pedal operation.

The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, Kia recommends that only the Kia floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Navigation system (if equipped)

The navigation system ascertains the present position of your vehicle by using information from satellites and guides you to the place you assign as the destination.

Detailed information for the navigation system is described in a separately supplied manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM

If you install an aftermarket HID head lamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic device may malfunction.

3D rendering of a mechanical component with a lever and circular motion indicator (no text or symbols)

Antenna

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. This antenna can be removed. To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

CAUTION - Antenna

Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna by rotating it counter-clockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception. But it could be removed when parking the vehicle.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with labeled controls (no text or symbols on the dashboard itself)

Steering wheel audio control (if equipped)

The steering wheel audio control button is installed to improve convenience.

Do not operate the audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

VOLUME (+/-) (1)

• Push the lever up to increase volume.
• Push the lever down to decrease volume.

MODE (3)

Press the button to select Radio or CD (compact disc).

MUTE (4)

• Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to activate the sound.

SEEK/PRESET (A) (2)

The SEEK/PRESET button has different functions base on the system mode. For the following functions the button should be pressed for 0.8 second or more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button.

CDP/USB/iPod® mode

It will function as the FF/REW button. iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

If the SEEK button is pressed for less than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION select buttons.

CDP/USB/iPod® mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN button.

Detailed information for audio control buttons is described in the following pages in this section.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (if equipped)

You can use a compatible phone via using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology. Detailed information for the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is described in the Audio system section.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with control buttons and a highlighted grip (no visible text or symbols)

Aux, USB and iPod® (if equipped)

If your vehicle has an AUX and/or USB (universal serial bus) port, you can use an AUX port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also an iPod® port to plug in an iPod®.

iPod® mobile digital device sold separately. Connectivity may require use of the Kia accessory cable.

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

FM reception

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction.

However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM reception

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.

FM radio station

graph TD
    A["Mountains"] --> B["Buildings"]
    B --> C["Iron bridges"]
    D["Unobstructed area"] --> B
    E["JBM003"] --> B

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

- Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

- Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

- Station Swapping - As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal. - Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

Satellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties in receiving Sirius XM® Satellite Radio signals in the following situations.

SATELITE1

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.
- If you are driving beneath the top level of a multi-level freeway.
• If you drive under a bridge.
- If you are driving next to a tall vehicle (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite.

- If you are driving on a mountain road where is the signal blocked by mountains.

graph TD
    A["Mountains"] --> B["Buildings"]
    B --> C["Iron bridges"]
    C --> D["Unobstructed area"]
    D --> E["Satellite"]
    E --> F["Wireless Signal"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

• If you are driving in an area with tall trees that block the signal (30 ft. / 10m or more), for example on an road that goes through a dense forest.
• The signal can become weak in some areas that are not covered by the SIRIUS repeater network.
  There may be other unforeseen circumstances leading to reception problems with the SIRIUS satellite radio signal.

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, try to operate mobile devices as far from the audio equipment as possible.

When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING - Cell phone use

Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.

WARNING - Driver Distraction

• Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.
  • Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING - Audio System Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in fire or electric shock.

⚠ WARNING - Antenna Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.

CAUTION

Refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction.

• Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)

• Turn on the car ignition before using the audio system. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off; such operations may lead to battery discharge.

• In case of product malfunction, please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

CAUTION

• Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the audio system and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration
• Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.
• Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration.

USING THE USB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device, make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.
  1) It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between 8Kbps \~ 320Kbps.
  2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps \~ 320Kbps.
  • Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB device is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short period of time, it may break the device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external USB device during playback in USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g, Radio)
• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time for recognition the device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as rechargers or heaters using USB I/F may lower performance or cause trouble.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a USB hub purchased separately, the vehicle's audio system may not recognize the USB device. In that case, connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
  • Devices such as MP3 Player/Cellular phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may not be supported in some mobile devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to connection failures due to vehicle vibrations are not supported. (i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this audio. Always back up important data on a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please make certain only to use plug type connector products.

USING iPod® DEVICE

iPhone ^® is a registered trademark of Apple inc.

- Some iPod® models may not support communication protocol and files may not play properly.

Supported iPod® models:

- iPhone® 3GS/4

- iPod® touch 1st\~4th generation

- iPod® nano 1st\~6th generation

- iPod® classic

- The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod® can be different from the order searched in the audio system.

- If the iPod is disabled due to its own malfunction, reset the iPod . (Reset: Refer to iPod manual)

- An iPod® may not operate normally on low battery.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Some iPod® devices, such as the iPhone®, can be connected through the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio Bluetooth® Wireless Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone Bluetooth® Wireless Technology). The device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.

- To use iPod® features within the audio mode, use the cable provided upon purchasing an iPod® device.

- Skipping or improper operation may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/iPhone® device.

- If your iPhone® is connected to both the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and USB, only iPod® mode will be supported during Bluetooth® Audio Streaming. To use Bluetooth® Audio Streaming, disconnect iPod® cable with iPhone®.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- When connecting iPod® with the iPod® Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket completely. If not inserted completely, communications between iPod® and audio may be interrupted.

- When adjusting the sound effects of the iPod® and the audio system, the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

- Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod® when adjusting the audio system's volume, and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod®.

- When not using iPod® with car audio, detach the iPod® cable from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may remain in accessory mode, and may not work properly.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology(if equipped)

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth ^® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. A Bluetooth ^® enabled call phone is required to use Bluetooth ^® Wireless Technology.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Before Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree

What is Bluetooth® ?

• Bluetooth® refers to a short-distance wireless networking technology which uses a 2.4GHz \~ 2.48GHz frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs, various electronic devices, and automotive environments, Bluetooth® allows data to be transmitted at high speeds without having to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with Bluetooth® mobile phones through the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be supported in some mobile phones. To learn more about mobile device compatibility, visit http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/owners/bluetooth.

Precautions for Safe Driving

• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the head unit with a Bluetooth® phone allows the user to conveniently make and receive calls and use contacts. Before using Bluetooth®, carefully read the contents of this user's manual.
• Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents. Refrain from excessive operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

When connecting a Bluetooth® Phone

• Before connecting the head unit with the mobile phone, check to see that the mobile phone supports Bluetooth® features.
• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth®, the phone will not be found during device searches if the phone has been set to hidden state or the Bluetooth® power is turned off. Disable the hidden state or turn on the Bluetooth® power prior to searching/connecting with the Head unit.
• If you do not want an automatic connection with your Bluetooth® device, turn off the Bluetooth® feature within your mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume and quality may differ depending on the mobile phone.

• Park the vehicle when connecting the head unit with the mobile phone.

• Bluetooth® connection may become intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones. Follow these steps to try again.
• Within the mobile phone, turn the Bluetooth® function off/on and try again.
• Turn the mobile phone power Off/On and try again.
• Completely remove the mobile phone battery, reboot, and then again.
• Reboot the audio system and try again.
• Delete all paired devices, pair and try again.

Voice Recognition (if equipped)

• When using the voice recognition feature, only commands listed within the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of the voice recognition system, pressing any key other than the ⚡️ key terminate voice recognition mode.
• For optimal voice recognition performance, position your head below the microphone above the driver's seat and maintain proper position when speaking voice commands.
• Within the following situations, voice recognition may not function properly due to external sound.
• When the windows and sunroof are open
• When the blower AC/heater is set to high
• When entering and passing through tunnels

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When driving on rugged and uneven roads
• During severe rain (heavy rains, windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can be used only when a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a name, the corresponding contact must be downloaded and stored within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone book, it takes some times to convert the phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice recognition may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.

The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences. Before reading the manual, check the following.

Press the √ in FM Radio screen.

1. If you can find "FM <89.1>"on the screen,

▶ (Go to 4-139 page)

1. If you can find "FM <87.5\~107.9>" on the screen,

▶ (Go to 4-243 page)

Standard Audio System

■ Type A-1

(equipped with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology)

■ Type A-2

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND FUNCTIONS

*Display and settings may differ depending on the selected audio.

Audio Head Unit

(1) △ (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.

(2) RADIO

Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode. Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 → FM2 → AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3.

* In Setup ▶Display, the radio pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned .On When the pop up screen is displayed, use the CUNE knob or keys 1 \~ 6 to select desired mode.

(3) MEDIA

Changes to CD, USB(iPod ^® ), AUX, My Music, BT Audio mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

* In Setup ▶Display, the media pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned On When the pop up screen is displayed, use the ⒽUNE knob or keys 1 \~ 5 to select desired mode.

(4) PHONE

Operates Phone Screen

*When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is displayed.

(5) √ SEEK TRACK

Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.

CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes

- Short the press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to next or previous song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

BT Audio mode : Moves to next or previous song(file)

*The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

(6) POWER/VOL knob

Power : Tums power On/Off by pressing the knob

Volume : Sets volume by turning the knob left/right

(7) DISP

Each time the button is shortly pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it sets the screen Off → Screen On → Screen Off

* Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off. In the screen Off state, press any key to turn the screen On again.

(8) SCAN

Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key : Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 6 for 5 seconds each.

*Press the SCAN again to continue listening to the current frequency.

*SAT Radio does not support the Preset scan feature.

CD, USB, My Music mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.

*Press the SCAN again to continue listening to the current song (file).

(9) SETUP/CLOCK

Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds): Moves to the Display, Sound, Clock, Phone, System setting modes Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Move to the Time setting screen

(10) MENU

Displays menus for the current mode.

* iPod® List : Move to parent category

(11) CAT FOLDER

Radio Mode®

- SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search

(12) TUNE knob

Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.

CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode : Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.

*When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song.

Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

(13) 1 \~ 6 (Preset)

Radio Mode : Saves frequencies (channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)

CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode

- 1 RPT : Repeat

- 2 RDM : Random

In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected.

■ Type A-2

(14) SAT

Changes to SiriusXM Satellite Radio mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3.

(15) MEDIA

Changes to CD, USB(iPod ^® ), AUX mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod ^® ), AUX.

*In Setup ▶Display, the media pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned.

When the pop up screen is displayed, use the ☐UNE knob or keys 1 \~ 6 to select desired mode.

(16) √ SEEK TRACK

Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.

CD, USB, iPod ^® modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to next or previous song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

*The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

(17) SCAN

Radio Mode

• Shortly press the key : Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 6 for 5 seconds each.

*Press the key again to continue listening to the current frequency.

*SAT Radio does not support the Preset scan feature.

CD, USB mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.

*Press the SCAN again to continue listening to the current song (file).

(18) TUNE knob

Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.

CD, USB, iPod® mode : Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.

*When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song. Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

SETUP

Display Settings

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes / OffOn selection mode

- During On state, press the RADIO or MEDIA display the mode change pop up screen.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from 'Folder/File' or 'Album/Artist/Song'.

SOUND SETTINGS

Press the SETUP/CLOCK ▶ [Sound] through ○TUNE knob or 2 RDM key ▶ Select menu through ○ TUNE knob

Tone

This menu allows you to set the Bass, Middle, Treble.

Select [Tone]▶ Select menu through ○ TUNE knob ▶ Turn ○ TUNE knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound tone.
• Default : Restores default settings.
  *Return : While adjusting values, pressing the ⒽTUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Position

This menu allows you to set the Fader, Balance.

Select [Position]▶ Select menu through ○ TUNE knob ▶ Turn Ⓣ TUNE knob left/right to set

• Fader, Balance : Selects the sound fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
  *Return : While adjusting values, pressing the ⒽTUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automatically control the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]▶ Set [Off/On] of Ⓞ TUNE knob

Voice Recognition Volume (if equipped)

Adjusts voice recognition volume.

Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]▶ Set volume of Ⓞ TUNE knob

CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Clock] through ⓊUNE knob or 3 key▶ Select menu through ⓊUNE knob

WARNING - Clock Setting Distraction

Do not adjust the clock while driving. You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.

Clock Settings

This menu is used to set the time. Select [Clock Settings] Set through TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

*Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the tune knob to set the [minute] and [AM/PM].

Calendar Settings

This menu is used to set the date. Select [Calendar Settings] Set through TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

*Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the tune knob to move to the next setting.

Time Format

This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system. Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through ● TUNE knob.

Clock Display when Power is OFF

Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)]▶Set ○/○/○ through ○ TUNE knob ○ On : Displays time/date on screen ○ Off : Turn off.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the SETUP/CLOCK Select [System] ▶ Select menu through ○ TUNE knob

Memory Information (if equipped)

Displays currently used memory and total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side.

Prompt Feedback (if equipped)

This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes.

Select [Prompt Feedback] ▶ Set through ⬙ TUNE knob

- On: This mode is for beginner users and provides detailed instructions during voice command operation.

- Off: This mode is for expert users and omits some information during voice command operation. (When using Expert mode, guidance instructions can be heard through the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language

This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language.

Select [Language]▶ Set through ◎ TUNE knob

*The system will reboot after the language is changed.

*Language support by region

- English, Francais, Espanol

RADIO : FM, AM or SiriusXM

SEEK

Press the

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Automatically searches for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): While holding the key, frequency changes without stopping. When the key is released, automatically searches for the next frequency from that point.

Preset SEEK

Press

key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from 1
  6 will save the currently playing broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SCAN

Press the SCAN

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. After scanning all frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 \~ 6 for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manual search

Turn the ○ TUNE knob left/right to adjust the frequency.

MENU

Within MENU key are the A.Store (Auto Store) and Info functions.

① A.Store

Press the MENU key▶Set [A.Store] through ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT key. Saves broadcasts with superior reception 1 6 keys frequencies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the Sirius Select package. You'll get over 140 channels, including commercial-free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selection of premium programming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

- Antenna obstructions : For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up

and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

- Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include :

• Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:

SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

SiriusXM RADIO

Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-month trial subscription to SiriusXM so you have access to over 140 channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate your Sirius Select subscription, you will need to contact SiriusXM Customer Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your 12-digit RID (Radio Identification Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial Number) ready. To retrieve the RID / ESN, turn on the radio, press the RADIO key, and tune to channel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activation signal.

SEEK

Press the RADIO

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Select previous or next channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Continuously move to previous or next channel.
  If the “Category” icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

SCAN

Press the

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each
  *Press the SCANain to continue listening to the current frequency
  *If the "Category" icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

Category

Press the

the TUNE knob

• The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press the ⬇CAT FOLDER key to navigate category list.
• Press the tune knob to select the lowest channel in the highlighted category.
  If channel is selected by selecting category, then the "CATEGORY" icon is displayed at the top of the screen.

Preset

Press the RADIO ▶ 1 6

- Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.

- Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from 1 6 will save the current broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

\*Troubleshooting

1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult with your Kia dealership.

2. No Signal

If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SiriusXM Satellite Radio signal is not available. Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky.

Tune

• Rotate 📊TUNE knob : Changes the channel number or scrolls category list.
• Press ⓊTUNE knob : Selects the menu.

Menu

Select category menu through the TUNE knob ▶ Press the MENU key ▶ Select [1Info] through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT key

Info (Information)

Displays the Artist/Song info of the current song.

BASIC METHOD OF USE : Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / iPod® / My Music

Press the MEDIA change the mode in order of CD → USB(iPod®) → AUX → My Music → BT Audio. The folder/file name is displayed on the screen.

*The CD is automatically played when a CD is inserted.

*The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

Repeat

While song (file) is playing ▶ 1 RPT (RPT) key

Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode : RPT on screen

• To repeat one song (press the key) : Repeats the current song.

MP3 CD, USB mode : FLD.RPT on screen

• To repeat folder (pressing twice) : repeats all files within the current folder.

*Press the 1 RPT again to turn off repeat.

Random

While song (file) is playing ▶ 2 RDM (RDM) key

Audio CD, My Music mode : RDM on screen

- Random (press the key) : Plays all songs in random order.

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen

• Folder Random (press the key) : Plays all files within the current folder in random order.
  iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays all files in random order.
  MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice) : Plays all files in random order.
  * Press the 2 _RDM again to turn off random.

Changing Song/File

While song (file) is playing ▶ SEEK key √ TRACK

• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the current song from the beginning.
  *If the ▼ SEEK TRACK pressed again within 2 seconds, the previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Rewinds the song.

While song (file) is playing▶ SEEK TRACK key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Fast forwards the song.

Scan

While song (file) is playing ▶ SCAN key

• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all songs from the next song for 10 seconds each.
  * Press the SCAN again to turn off.
  * The SCAN function is not supported in iPod® mode.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB Mode

While file is playing ▶ CAT FOLDER (Folder Up) key

• Searches the next folder.
  While file is playing ▶ FOLDER (Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
  ※ If a folder is selected by pressing the ⒽUNE knob, the first file within the selected folder will be played.
  *In iPod mode, moves to the Parent Folder.

Searching Songs (File)

• Turning ⒷUNE knob : Searches for songs (files)
• Pressing Ⓐ TUNE knob : Plays selected song (file).

MENU : Audio CD

Press the Audio CD mode MENU key to set the Repeat, Random, Information features.

Repeat

Press the MENU set [ RPT] ① through the 📊TUNE knob or 1 RPT key to repeat the current song. * Press RPT again to turn off.

Random

Press the MENU et [ RDM] ② through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM key to randomly play songs within the current CD. ※ Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU set [Info] ③ through the ○ TUNE knob or 3 key to display information of the current song.

*Press the MENU b turn off info display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the MP3 CD / USB mode MENU key to set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder Repeat, All Random, Information, and Copy features.

Repeat

Press the MENU et [ RPT] ① through the ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT key to repeat the current song. ※ Press RPT again to turn off.

Folder Random

Press the MENU t [F,RDM]② through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM key to randomly play songs within the current folder.

* Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat

Press the MENU key Set [F3RPT] through the TUNE knob or 3 key to repeat songs within the current folder.

* Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random

Press the MENU key Set [A/RDM] through the TUNE knob or 4 key to randomly play all songs within the CD / USB.

* Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU set [Info] through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the current song.

* Press the MENU turn off info display.

Copy (if equipped)

Press the MENU et [ Copy] ⑥ through the Ⓐ TUNE knob or 6 key.

This is used to copy the current song into My Music. You can play the copied Music in My Music mode.

*If another key is pressed while copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed.

*If another media is connected or inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX) while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.

*Music will not be played while copying is in progress.

MENU : iPod®

In iPod® mode, press the MENU to set the Repeat, Random, Information and Search features.

Repeat

Press the MENU et [ RPT] ① through the ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT key to repeat the current song.

* Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the MENU et [▶RDM]② through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM key.

Plays all songs within the currently playing category in random order.

* Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU Set [Info] ③ through the ○ TUNE knob or 3 key.

Displays information of the current song.

* Press the MENU turn off info display.

Search

Press the MENU key Set [ Search] through the ○ TUNE knob or 4 key.

Displays iPod® category list.

*Searching iPod® category is MENU key pressed, move to parent category.

MENU : My Music Mode

In My Music mode, press the MENU key to set the Repeat, Random, Information, Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection features.

Repeat

Press the MENU set [ RPT] ① through the ○TUNE knob or key.

Repeats the currently playing song. *Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the MENU et [ RDM] ② through the ⒽUNE knob or 2 RDM key.

Plays all songs in random order. * Press RDM again to turn random off.

Information

Press the MENU set [▶Info] ③ through the ○ TUNE knob or 3 key.

Displays information of the current song.

*Press the MENU b turn off info display.

Delete

Press the MENU at [Delete]④ through the ⒽUNE knob or key.

Deletes currently playing file. In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song. Deletes file from list.

①Select the file you wish to delete by using the ○ TUNE knob. ②Press the MENU and select the delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All

Press the MENU key▶Set [Del.All] through the TUNE knob or 5 key. Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection

Press the MENU et [▶Del.SG] through the ○ TUNE knob or 6 key. Songs within My Music are selected and deleted.

①Select the songs you wish to delete from the list.

②After selecting, press MENU and select the delete menu.

My Music

• Even if memory is available, a maximum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
• The same song can be copied up to 1,000 times.
- Memory info can be checked in the System menu of Setup.

AUX

AUX is used to play external MEDIA currently connected with the AUX terminal.

AUX mode will automatically start when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.

If an external device is connected, you can also press the MEDIA change to AUX mode.

* AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

AUX

Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX terminal for use.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology AUDIO

What is Bluetooth® Wireless Technology?

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows devices to be connected in a short distance, including hands-free devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology website at www.Bluetooth.com

Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio features

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio may not be supported depending on the compatibility of your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.

- The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio can be used only when the [Audio Streaming] of Phone is turned On.

Starting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio

• Press the MEDIA change the mode in order of CD → USB → AUX → My Music → BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio will start playing.
  *Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio features

- Play / Stop

Press the ⒹTUNE knob to play and pause the current song.

*The title / artist info may not be supported in some mobile phone. When it is not supported, no title / no artist will be displayed.
- Previous / Next song

Press SEEK TRACK to play previous or next song.

*The previous song / next song / play / pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.

PHONE

Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone features

- In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.

- If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.

- If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone connection, set the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology power to OFF.

Making a call using the Steering-wheel mount controls

(1) VOLUME key/scroll wheel : Raises or lowers speaker volume.

(2) Pxy : Places and transfers calls.

(3) 📄 y : Ends calls or cancels functions.

(4) MUTE key :Mutes the microphone during a call.

(5) : Activates voice recognition.

*The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

- Check call history and making calls

- Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the 🔔 key on the steering remote controller.

- The call history list will be displayed on the screen.

- Press the 🔔 key again to connect a call to the selected number.

• Redialing the most recently called number

- Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the 🔔 key on the steering remote controller.

- The most recently called number is redialed.

* If call history does not exist, a screen asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones)

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Device

What is Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone or device with the car audio system for connection. Pairing is necessary to connect and use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Pairing PHONE key

/

on the Steering Remote Controller

key

When No Devices have been Paired

1. Press the PHONE the

key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.

1. Select [OK] button to enter the Pair Phone screen.

1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as shown when searching from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the device
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone), search and select your car audio system.

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

1. After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered. Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device]

1. After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device and confirm.

1. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, Android™ and Blackberry® phones) may offer an option to allow acceptance of all future Bluetooth connection requests by default." and "Visit http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/owners/bluetooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibility list.

- If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the PHONE key or the ⬤ on the steering wheel displays the following screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a new device or select [Connect] to connect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

1. The following steps are the same as those described in the section "When No Devices have been Paired" on the previous page.

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call (Switch to Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Mobile Contacts

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device auto connection

- Bluetooth Audio Streaming

- Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired to the Car Handsfree system.

- Only one Bluetooth® device can be connected at a time.

- Only one Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device can be connected at a time.

- Other devices cannot be paired while a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected.

- Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth audio related features are supported.

- Bluetooth related operations are possible only within devices that support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio device.

- If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

- If the system becomes unstable due to communication errors between the car Handsfree and the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, reset the device by turning off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, the system will be restored.

- After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent once to the mobile phone. Some mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the connection. Refer to your phones user's manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Phone] Select [Phone List]

1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and select [Connect].

Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. The "Change Priority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the highest priority, then select [Change Priority] button from the Menu. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority.

- Priority icon will be displayed when the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Disconnecting a Device

Press the [Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and select [Disconnect] button.

Deleting a Device

Press the SETUP/CLOCKS [Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and select [Delete] button.

• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is deleted, the device's call history and contacts data will also be deleted.
  • To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

USING Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected, press the PHONE key to display the Phone menu screen.

1) Fav : Up to 20 frequently used contacts can be saved for easy access.
2) History : Displays the call history list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related settings.

• If you select the [History] button but there is no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button but there is no contacts data stored, a prompt is displayed which asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user's manual.

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen. To accept the call, press 📄 on the steering wheel while the call is incoming.

1) Caller : Displays the other party's name when the incoming caller is saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number

\*NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate.
  • The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones.

Favorites

Press the Select [Favorites]

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts can be saved as favorite.

• To save Favorite, contacts should be downloaded.
- Contact saved in Favorites will not be automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new Favorite.

Call History

Press the PHONE Elect [Call History]

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed.

• Call history may not be saved in the call history list in some mobile phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID will not be saved in the call history list.
• Calling through the call history is not possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History.
  • Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not stored in Call History.

Contacts

Press the PHONE Select [Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entries is displayed.

NOTE: Find a contact in an alphabetical order, press the MENU

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone can be downloaded into the car contacts. Contacts that have been downloaded to the car cannot be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device has been disconnected. (However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.

• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact download feature has been turned off within the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. In addition, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur, check the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.

• The contacts download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth® devices and function support, refer to your phone's user's manual.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Setting

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Pairing a New Device

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the "Pairing through Phone Setup" section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Phone] Select [Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the "Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Connection" section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone Connect/ disconnects currently selected phone
2) Priority : Sets currently selected phone to highest connection priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous screen

• To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone user's manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.

: Downloading Contacts Press the ▶ [Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, a download progress bar is displayed.

• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.
  • Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

Outgoing Volume Press the SETUP/CLOCKS [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use ⒽUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.

- While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the SEEK TRACK

Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the SETUP/CLOCK ▶ [Phone]▶Select [Bluetooth System Off]

Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

- To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to SETUP/CLOCK and select "Yes".

VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the K y on the steering wheel. Say a command.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the system will say "Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)"

• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode, then the system will only say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback [On]/[Off], go to SETUP/CLOCK ▶ [System] ▶ [Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices

1) Use full names vs. short or single-syllable names ("John Smith" vs. "Dad", "Smith Residence" vs. "Home")
2) Avoid using special characters or hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
3) Avoid using acronyms ("In Case Emergency" vs. "ICE")
4) Spell words completely, no abbreviations ("Doctor Goodman" vs. "Dr. Goodman")

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated shortly press the key on the steering remote controller

The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the "beep", say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command▶ Shortly press the 🔔 key on the steering remote controller

The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the “beep”, say the voice command.

ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operating

▶Press and hold the 📋 on the steering remote controller

• While using voice command, pressing any steering wheel control or a different key will end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a voice command, say "cancel" or "end" to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a voice command, press and hold the key on the steering wheel to end voice command.

Voice Recognition and Phone Contact Tips:

The Kia Voice Recognition System may have difficulty understanding some accents or uncommon names. When using Voice Recognition to place a call, speak in a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation.

To maximize the use of Voice Recognition, consider these guidelines when storing contacts :

• Use full names vs. short or single syllable names ("John Smith" vs. "Dad", "Smith Residence" vs. "Home")
• Avoid using special characters or hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms ("In Case Emergency" vs. "ICE")
• Spell words completely, no abbreviations ("Doctor Goodman" vs. "Dr. Goodman")

Illustration on using voice commands

- Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the ⚙ (under 0.8 seconds) :

graph TD
    A["Car"] --> B["Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)"]
    B --> C["Beep~"]
    C --> D["More Help"]

• Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the ⚡ (under 0.8 seconds) :

- Ending voice command.

Shortly pressing the ⚡ (under 0.8 seconds) :

Voice Command List

- Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)

Command Function

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode.

Callssaved in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith"

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say "Favorites", "Call History", "Contacts" or "Dial Number" execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Command Function
Contacts	Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this command, say the name of a contact saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number	Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call.
Redial	Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial	Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition and Bluetooth® connections
Radio	When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen. (FM1→FM2→AM→SAT1→SAT2→SAT3→FM1)When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played radio screen.When currently listening to the FM radio, main tains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)	Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)	Displays the FM2 screen.
AM	Displays the AM screen.
FM Preset 1~6	Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
SIRIUS (Satellite)	When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite) 1~3	Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
SIRIUS Channel 0~223	Plays the selected SiriusXMChannel.
Media Moves to	the most recently played media screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod®	Plays iPod® music.

Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio	Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® device.
Mute	Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit)	Ends voice command.

- FM/AM radio commands : Commands available during FM, AM radio operation.

Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays	the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable	frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves	to the next preset from the current present and plays for 10 seconds each.

- Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function
Channel 0~223	Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays	the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.

- Audio CD commands : Commands available during Audio CD operation.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

- MP3 CD / USB commands : Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation.

Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current file.
Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder	Plays the first file in the previous folder.

- iPod® Commands : Commands available during iPod® operation.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays the songs within the current category.

Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

- My Music Commands : Commands available during My Music operation.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays all saved files.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.

Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands : Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.

iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device sold separately. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

Standard Audio System

System Controllers and Functions

Audio Head Unit

1. (T)
2. Ejects the disc.

2. RADIO

• Converts to Radio mode.
  • Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM, SAT1, SAT2, SAT3.

3. MEDIA

• Converts to Media mode.
  • Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

4. PHONE

• Converts to Phone mode
  * When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is displayed.

5. POWER/VOL knob

• Power : Press to turn power on/off.
• Volume :Turn left/right to control volume.

6. SEEK TRACK

- When pressed shortly(under 0.8 seconds)

• Radio mode : plays previous/next frequency.
• Media (CD /USB /iPod®/My Music) modes : changes the track, Song(file)

- When pressed and held (Over 0.8 seconds)

• Radio mode : continuously changes the frequency. Upon release, plays the current frequency.
• Media(CD /USB /iPod®/My Music) modes : rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
• During a Handsfree call, controls the call volume.

7. CAT FOLDER

• SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search
  • MP3 CD/USB mode : Search Folder

8. DISP

- Turns the monitor display on/off.

9. CLOCK

- Shortly press the key(under 0.8 seconds): Display time screen

- Press and hold the key(over 0.8 seconds): Move to the time setting mode

10. SCAN

• Radio mode : previews all receivable broadcasts for 5 seconds each
  • Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes: previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.

11. SETUP

- Converts to Setup mode.

12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast frequencies.
  • Media (CD/USB/iPo®/My Music) modes : turn to search Tracks/channels/files.

13. RESET

- Forced system termination and system restart.

Steering remote controller

* The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. MUTE

- Mutes the microphone during a call.

2. MODE

• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 → FM2 → AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3 → CD → USB(iPod®) → AUX → My Music → BT Audio

- If the media is not connected or a disc is not inserted, corresponding modes will be disabled.

3. VOLUME

• Used to control volume.

4.

- When pressed shortly

- When pressed in the phone screen, displays call history screen

- When pressed in the dial screen, makes a call

- When pressed in the incoming call screen, answers the call

- When pressed during call waiting, switches to waiting call (Call Waiting)

- When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)

- When pressed in the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree wait mode, redials the last call

- When pressed during a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree call, switches call back to mobile phone (Private)

- When pressed while calling on the mobile phone, switches call back to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree (Operates only when Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree is connected)

5.

- Ends phone call

6.

- When pressed shortly

- Starts voice recognition - When selecting during a voice prompt, stops the prompt and converts to voice command waiting state

- When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)

- Ends voice recognition

RADIO MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display Displays currently operating mode.

2. Frequency Displays the current frequency.

3. Preset Displays current preset number 1 \~ 6.

4. Preset Display Displays preset buttons.

5. A.Store Automatically saves frequencies with superior reception to Preset buttons.

Switching to Radio Mode

Pressing the RADIO I change the operating mode in order of FM1 → FM2 → AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3

If Mode Pop up on within SETUP ▶ Display, then pressing the RADIO key will display the Radio Pop-up Mode screen.

Turn the ⒶTUNE knob to move the focus. Press the knob to select.

Searching Radio Frequencies

Using Seek

Press the ▼ SEEK ▼ TRACK ▼ play the previous/next frequency.

Using TUNE

Turn the ⒽUNE knob to select the desired frequency.

Using Radio Mode

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the Preset n to display the broadcast information for the frequency saved to each button.

Press the 1 buttons to play the desired preset.

NOTICE

While listening to a frequency you want to save as a preset, press and hold one of the 1 pre 6 buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the current frequency to the selected preset.

Auto Store

Press the A.Store to automatically save receivable frequencies to Preset buttons.

Scan

Press the SCAN preview frequencies with superior reception for 5 seconds each.

Press and hold the SCAN er 0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5 seconds each.

Once scan is complete, the previous frequency will be restored. While Scan is operating, pressing the SCAN key will cancel the scan operation.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the Sirius Select package. You'll get over 140 channels, including commercial-free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selection of premium programming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

- Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and

other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

- Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include:

- Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

- For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:

SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

SiriusXM RADIO MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display Displays currently operating mode.
2. Channel Information Displays the category, channel number, channel name, artist and title information.
3. Preset Displays current playing preset number 1 \~ 6 .
4. Preset Display Displays saved presets.
5. Info Displays detailed information about the current broadcast.

Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-month trial subscription to SiriusXM so you have access to over 140 channels channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate your Sirius Select subscription, you will need to contact SiriusXM Customer Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your 12-digit RID (Radio Identification Number) / ESN (Electro-nic Serial Number) ready. To retrieve the RID / ESN, turn on the radio, press the RADIO key, and tune to channel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activation signal.

Using SEEK

Press the ▼ SEEK ▲ play the previous/next channel.

* If the "Category" icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

Using Tune

Turn the ⒶUNE knob to select the desired channel.

SCAN

Press the SCAN scan all channels with superior reception for 5 seconds each.

Once scan is complete, the previously played channel will be restored.

During Scan, pressing the SCAN key again will cancel the scan operation and restore the previously played channel.

If the "Category" icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

Searching Categories

Select the category by using the Ⓗ FOLDER key and press the Ⓗ UNE knob to select.

Channels for the selected category are played.

\*Troubleshooting

1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult with your Kia dealership.

1. No Signal

If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SiriusXM Satellite Radio signal is not available. Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky.

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the Preset in to display the broadcast information for the channel saved to each button.

Press the 6\~ buttons the desired preset.

NOTICE

While listening to a channel you want to save as a preset, press and hold one of the 1 \~ 6 preset buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the current channel to the selected preset.

\*NOTICE - USING CDs

• This device has been manufactured to be compatible with software bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical solutions, such as record sprays, antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids, benzene, or thinners.
  • After using a disc, put the disc back in its original case to prevent disc scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within the center hole to prevent damages to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances into the disc insert/eject slot. Introducing foreign substances could damage the device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs, differences in disc reading and playing times may occur depending on the disc manufacturer, production method and the recording method as used by the user.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Clean fingerprints and dust off the disc surface (coated side) with a soft cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs attached with labels may result in disc slot jams or difficulties in disc removal. Such discs may also result in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not properly operate depending on the disc manufacturer, production method and the record method as used by the user. If problems persist, trying using a different CD as continued use may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product may differ depending on the CD-RW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type CDs may not function in the device. DATA discs cannot be played. (However, such discs may still operate but will do so abnormally.)
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use abnormally shaped discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped) as such discs could lead to malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc slot without removal for 10 seconds, the disc will automatically be re-inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in recognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)

MEDIA MODE

Pressing the MEDIA I change the operating mode in order of CD → USB(iPod®) → AUX → My Music → BT Audio.

If Mode Pop up on within

SETUP ▶ Display, then pressing the MEDIA key will display the Media Mode Pop up screen.

Turn the 📄TUNE knob to move the focus. Press the knob to select.

\*NOTICE

- The media Mode Pop up screen can be displayed only when there are two or more media modes turned on.

Title Icon

When a Bluetooth ^® Wireless Technology, iPod ^® , USB, or AUX device is connected or a CD is inserted, the corresponding mode icon will be displayed.

CD
Icon	Title
	Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
	CD
	iPod®
	USB
	AUX

AUDIO CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the currently operating function.

3. Track Info Displays information about the current track.

4. Play/Pause Changes the play/pause state.

5. Play Time Displays the current play time.

6. Info Shows detailed information about the current track.

7. Shuffle Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.

8. Repeat Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

9. List Moves to the list screen.

Using Audio CD Mode

Playing/Pausing CD Tracks

Once an audio CD is inserted, the mode will automatically start and begin playing.

While playing, press the button to pause and press button to play.

\*NOTICE

• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information are displayed on the screen if track information is included within the audio CD.

Changing Tracks

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next track.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK after the track has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current track from the beginning.
• Pressing the 12 SEEK before the track has been playing for 1 second will start the previous track.

Selecting from the List

Turn the ⒶTUNE knob left/right to search for the desired track.

Once you find the desired track, press the ⒽTUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current track.

Scan

Press the SCAN play the first 10 seconds of each file.

Audio CD Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat and List features.

Info

Press the Infoton to display details about the current disc.

Shuffle

Press the Shufflen to play tracks in shuffle order.

Press the Shuffle again to turn the Shuffle feature off.

- Shuffle : Plays all tracks in shuffle order.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current track. Press the button again to turn the repeat feature off.

- Repeat: Repeats the current track.

List

Press the bList on to display the track list screen.

Turn the 📄TUNE knob left/right to search for tracks. Once the desired track is displayed, press the knob to select and play.

MP3 CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode
   Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
   From Repeat /Shuffle /Scan, displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index
   Displays the current file number.

4. File Info

Displays information about the current file.

1. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

1. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

1. Info

Shows detailed information about the current file.

1. Shuffle
   Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
2. Repeat
   Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
3. Copy
   Copies the current file into My Music
4. List
   Moves to the list screen.

Using MP3 CD Mode

Playing/Pausing MP3 Files

Once an MP3 disc is inserted the mode will automatically start and being playing.

While playing, press the ▶□ton to pause and press ▶□ton to play.

\*NOTICE

If there are numerous files and folders within the disc, reading time could take more than 10 seconds and the list may not be displayed or song searches may not operate. Once loading is complete, try again.

Changing Files

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next file.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK/TRACK after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the beginning.
• Pressing the SEEK TRACK before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the ⒽTUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the ⒶUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the SCAN play the first 10 seconds of each file.

Searching Folders

Press the CAT FOLDER lect and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed, press the ☑UNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.

MP3 CD Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat, Copy and List features.

Info

Press the Infoton to display details about the current file.

\*NOTICE

• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as the default display within Display setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option is set as the default display, the folder name/file name are displayed as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are displayed only when such information are recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle to play files in shuffle order.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Shuffle Folder → Shuffle All → Off.

• Shuffle Folder : Plays all files within the current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle order.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current file or folder.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Repeat → Repeat Folder → Off.

• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within the current Folder.

Copying Files

Press the Copy button to copy the current file into My Music.

\*NOTICE

Selecting another feature during copying will display a pop-up asking whether you wish to cancel copying. To cancel, select "Yes".

List

Press the List on to display the file list screen.

Turn the ⒽTUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play.

\*NOTICE - USING THE USB DEVICE

• Connect the USB device after turning on the engine. The USB device may become damaged if it is already connected when the ignition is turned on. The USB device may not operate properly if the car ignition is turned on or off with the USB device connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity when connecting/disconnecting USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be recognized when connected as an external device.
• When connecting an external USB device, the device may not properly recognize the USB is in some states.
• Only products formatted with byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file formats. This device does not recognize files in NTFS file format.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some USB devices may not be supported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB connector with bodily parts or foreign objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting of USB devices within short periods of time may result in product malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect external USB devices with the audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to recognize the USB device may differ depending on the type, size or file formats stored in the USB. Such differences in time are not indications of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use the USB I/F to charge batteries or USB accessories that generate heat. Such acts may lead to worsened performance or damage to the device.
• The device may not recognize the USB device if separately purchased USB hubs and extension cables are being used. Connect the USB directly with the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB devices with separate logical drives, only files saved to the root drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate if application programs are installed to the USBs.
• The device may not operate normally if MP3 Players, cellular phones, digital cameras, or other electronic devices (USB devices not recognized as portable disk drives) are connected with the device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Charging through the USB may not work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB Memory.
• The device may not support normal operation when using formats such as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
• The device will not support files locked by DRM (Digital Rights Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by connecting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF Type) may not be properly recognized.
• The device may not operate properly when using USB HDDs or USBs subject to connection failures caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-stick type)

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Avoid use of USB memory products that can also be used as key chains or mobile phone accessories. Use of such may cause damage to the

- Connecting an MP3 device or phone through various channels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USB mode may result in pop noises or abnormal operation.

products USB jack.

USB MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

1. Operation State

From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the currently operating function.

1. File Index

Displays the current file number.

1. File Info

Displays information about the current file.

1. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

1. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

1. Info

Displays detailed information for the current file.

1. Shuffle

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.

1. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

1. Copy

Copies the current file into My Music.

1. List

Moves to the list screen.

Using USB Mode

Playing/Pausing USB Files

Once a USB is connected, the mode will automatically start and begin playing a USB file.

While playing, press the button to pause and press button to play.

\*NOTICE

• Loading may require additional time if there are many files and folders within the USB and result in faulty list display or file searching. Normal operations will resume once loading is complete.
• The device may not support normal operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB Memory.

Changing Files

Press the ✅ SEEK TRACK ↗ move to the previous or next file.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK TRACK after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the beginning.
• Pressing the SEEK TRACK before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the ⒶUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the ⒶUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the SCAN key to play the first 10 seconds of each file.

Searching Folders

Press the CAT FOLDER elect and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed, press the ⒽUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.

USB Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat, Copy and List features.

Info

Press the Infoton to display details about the current file.

\*NOTICE

• When the 'Folder File' option is set as the default display within Display setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option is set as the default display, the folder name/file name are displayed as detailed file information.
  •The title, artist and album info are displayed only when such information are recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.

Shuffle

Press the Shufflen to play files in shuffle order.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Shuffle Folder → Shuffle All → Off.

• Shuffle Folder : Plays the files in the current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle order.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current file or folder.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Repeat→ Repeat Folder → Off.

• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files within the current folder.

Copying Files

Press the Copy to copy the current file into My Music.

\*NOTICE

Selecting another feature during copying will display a pop-up asking whether you wish to cancel copying. To cancel, select "Yes".

List

Press the bList on to display the file list screen.

Turn the 📄TUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play.

\*NOTICE - USING THE iPod® DEVICE

• iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod while operating the keys, you must use a dedicated iPod cable. (the cable that is supplied when purchasing iPod /iPhone products)
• If the iPod is connected to the vehicle while it is playing, a high pitch sound could occur for approximately 1-2 seconds immediately after connecting. If possible, connect the iPod to the vehicle with the iPod stopped/paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting the iPod through the iPod cable will charge the iPod through the car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod® cable, make sure to fully insert the jack to prevent communication interference.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When the EQ features of an external device, such as the iPod®, and the audio system are both active, EQ effects could overlap and cause sound deterioration and distortion. Whenever possible, turn off the EQ feature within the external device upon use by connecting with the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod or AUX device is connected. When such devices are not being used, disconnect the device for storage.
• When the iPod or AUX device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may result in noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use.
• Skipping or improper operation may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod® /iPhone® device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If your iPhone® is connected to both the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and USB, the sound may not be properly played. In your iPhone®, select the Dock connector or Bluetooth® Wireless Technology to change the sound output (source).
• iPod® mode cannot be operated when the iPod® cannot be recognized due to versions that do not support communication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod® Nano devices, the iPod® may not be recognized when the battery level is low. Please charge the iPod® for use.
• Search/play orders shown within the iPod® device may differ with the orders shown within the audio system.
• If the iPod® malfunctions due to an iPod® device defect, reset the iPod® and try again. (To learn more, refer to your iPod® manual)

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some iPod® may not sync with the System depending on its version. If the Media is removed before the Media is recognized, then the system may not properly restore the previously operated mode. (iPad® charging is not supported.)
• Beside support 1M cable when purchasing iPod/iPhone products, Long Cable cannot be recognized.

iPod® MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode
   Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
   From Repeat/Shuffle, displays the currently operating function.

3. Song Index
   Displays the current song/total number of songs.

4. Song Info
   Displays information about the current song.

5. Play/Pause
   Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
   Displays the current play time.
7. Shuffle
   Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
8. Repeat
   Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
   Moves to the list screen.

Using iPod® Mode

Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs

Once an iPod ^® is connected, the mode will automatically start and begin playing an iPod ^® song.

While playing, press the button to pause and press button to play.

\*NOTICE

iPod® with unsupported communication protocols may not properly operate in the audio system.

Changing Songs

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next song.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK after the song has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current song from the beginning.
• Pressing the 📁 SEEK TRACK fore the song has been playing for 1 second will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist depending your iPod® product.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current song.

Searching Categories

Turn the ⒶUNE knob left/right to search for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category, press the ⒹUNE knob to select and play.

\*NOTICE

There are eight categories that can be searched, including Playlists, Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers, Audiobooks and Podcasts.

Category Menu

Within the iPod® Category menu, you will have access to the Home and features.

1. plays the play screen
2. Home es to the iPod ® root cat-egory screen
3. Moves to the previous category

\*NOTICE

• If the search mode is accessed while playing a song, the most recently searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection may differ depending on the type of iPod® device.

iPod® Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Shuffle, Repeat and List features.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle n to play songs in shuffle order.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Shuffle All → Off → Shuffle All.

- Shuffle All : Plays all songs in shuffle order.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current song. Press the button again to turn the repeat feature off.

- Repeat: Repeats the current song

List

Press the List on to display the Category Menu.

Turn the Ⓞ TUNE knob left/right to search for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category, press the Ⓐ TUNE knob to select and play.

AUX MODE

Using AUX Mode

An external device can be connected to play music.

Connecting an External Device

External audio players (Camcorders, car VCR, etc.) can be played through a dedicated cable.

\*NOTICE

• If an external device connector is connected with the AUX terminal, then AUX mode will automatically operate. Once the connector is disconnected, the previous mode will be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when an external audio player (camcorder, car VCR, etc.) has been connected.
  • The AUX volume can be controlled separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the AUX terminal without an external device will convert the system to AUX mode, but only output noise. When an external device is not being used, also remove the connector jack.
• When the external device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may output noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX jack upon use.

MY MUSIC MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index Displays the current file/total number of files.

4. File Info Displays information about the current file.

5. Play/Pause Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time Displays the current play time.

7. Info Displays detailed information for the current file.

8. Shuffle Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.

9. Repeat Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

10. Delete Deletes the current file.

11. List Moves to the list screen.

Using My Music Mode

Playing/Pausing My Music Files

While playing, press the 10 ton to pause and press 10 ton to play.

\*NOTICE

If there are no files saved within My Music, the My Music will be disabled.

Changing Files

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next file.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the beginning.
• Pressing the SEEK TRACK before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the ⒶTUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the ⒶTUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the SCAN play the first 10 seconds of each file.

My Music Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat, Delete and List features.

Info

Press the info on to display details about the current file.

\*NOTICE

The title, artist and album info are displayed only when such information is recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle to play files in shuffle order. Press the button again to turn the Shuffle feature off.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current song. Press the button again to turn the repeat feature off.

Deleting Files

Press the Delete to delete the current file.

List

Press the bList on to display the file list screen.

Turn the ⒶUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play.

List Menu

From the List screen, it is possible to delete files you previously saved into My Music.

Press the Select All: individually select the files you want to delete. Once files are selected, the Unselect All button and Delete will be enabled.

1) moves to the previous screen
2) Select All : Selects all files
3) Unselect All : Deselects all selected files
4) Delete : Deletes selected files

After selecting the files you want to delete, press the Delete to delete the selected files.

\*NOTICE

• If there is memory available, up to 6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to SETUP ▶ Memory InformationS

\*NOTICE - USING THE Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode can be used only when a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode will not be available when connecting mobile phones that do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio is playing, if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is connected, then the music will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while playing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio mode may result in pop noises in some mobile phones.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology streaming audio may not be supported in some mobile phones.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When returning to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode after ending a call, the mode may not automatically restart in some mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or making an outgoing call while playing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio may result in audio interference.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology AUDIO MODE

Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode

Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio

Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected, the mode will automatically start.

While playing, press the button to pause and press button to play.

\*NOTICE

The play/pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

Changing Files

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next file.

Setting Connection

If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device has not been connected, press the SETUP key ▶ Phone button display the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection screen.

It is possible to use the pair phone, connect/disconnect and delete features from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone.

②②

\*NOTICE

- If music is not yet playing from your mobile device after converting to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode, pressing the play button once may start playing the mode. Check to see that music is playing from the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device after converting to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode.

to

Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Device

What is Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone or device with the car audio system for connection. Pairing is necessary to connect and use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Pairing Using the PHONE the Steering Wheel Control key

When No Devices have been Paired

1. Press the PHONE the key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.
2. Press the OKton to enter the Pair Phone screen.

1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as shown when searching from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the device
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone), search and select your car audio system.

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

1. After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered.

Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device]

1. After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey.

Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device and confirm.

1. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

*NOTICE

If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the PHONE key or the KEY on the steering wheel displays the following screen. Press the Pair on to pair a new device or press the Connect ect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

1. The following steps are the same as those described in the section "When No Devices have been Paired" on the previous page.

NOTICE

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.
• Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
• Operations during a call (Switch to Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC on/off)
• Downloading Call History
• Downloading Mobile Contacts
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device auto connection
• Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices can be paired to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth Wireless Technology device can be connected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth audio related features are supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Bluetooth related operations are possible only with devices that support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due to communication errors between the car Handsfree and the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, reset the device by turning off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, the system will be restored.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent once to the mobile phone. Some mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the connection. Refer to your phones user's manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device

Press the SETUP Select

1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and press the Connect

Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. The "Change Priority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

Press the SETUP Select

From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the highest priority, then press the Change priority button from the Menu. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority.

\*NOTICE

Priority icon will be displayed when the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Disconnecting a Device

Press the SETUP Select ▶ Select Paired Phone ListF

From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and press the Disconnect

Deleting a Device

Press the SETUP Select ▶ Select Paired Phone ListP

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and press the Delete button.

\*NOTICE

• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is deleted, the device's call history and contacts data will also be deleted.
  • To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

USING Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected, press the PHONE key to display the Phone menu screen.

1) Favorites : Up to 20 frequently used contacts saved for easy access
2) Call History : Device the call history list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen
4) Dial Number : Displays the dial screen where numbers can be dialed to make calls
5) Setup : Displays Phone related settings.

\*NOTICE

• If you press the Call History but there is no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data.
• If you press the Contacts but there is no contacts data stored, a prompt is displayed which asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user's manual.

Favorites

Press the PHONE Select

Favorites

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.
3) Delete All : Delete all stored favorite contacts

NOTICE

• To save Favorite, contacts should be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not be automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new Favorite.

Call History

Press the PHONE Select Call History

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed.

Press the Download download the call history.

1) Call History :

- Displays recent calls (call history)

- Connects call upon selection

2) Download : Download Recent Call History

- Call history may not be saved in the call history list in some mobile phones.

- Calls received with hidden caller ID will not be saved in the call history list.

- Calling through the call history is not possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is not connected.

- Up to 50 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History.

- Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not saved.

Contacts

Press the PHONE Select Contacts

The list of saved phone book entries is displayed. Press the Download ton to download the call history.

1) Contacts List :

• Displays downloaded contacts entries
• Connects call upon selection
  2) Sort by : Find a contact in an alphabetical order.
  3) Download : Download contacts entries

\*NOTICE

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone can be downloaded into the car contacts. Contacts that have been downloaded to the car cannot be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device has been disconnected. (However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)

(Continued)

(Continued)

• It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.
• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact download feature has been turned off within the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. In addition, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur, check the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth® devices and function support, refer to your phone's user manual.

Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the PHONE Select Dial Number

1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone number
2) Call : If a number has been entered, calls the number If no number has been entered, switches to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers one digit at a time

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a Bluetooth ^® Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.

1) Caller : Displays the other party's name when the incoming caller is saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number
3) Accept : Accepts the incoming call
4) Reject : Rejects the incoming call

\*NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate.
  •The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones.

During a Handsfree Call

1) Caller : Displays the other party's name if the incoming caller is saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard by the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off

NOTICE

If the mic is muted, the other party will not be able to hear your voice.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Setting

Pairing a New Device

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the "Pairing through Phone Setup" section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the "Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Connection" section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

1) moves to the previous screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/ disconnects currently selected phone
3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone
4) Change priority : Sets currently selected phone to highest connection priority

\*NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-LOADING CONTACTS

• Only contacts within connected phones can be downloaded. Also check to see that your mobile phone supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone user's manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, a download progress bar is displayed.

\*NOTICE

• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

Outgoing Volume

Use the outputs to adjust the outgoing volume level.

\*NOTICE

While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the SEEK TRACK

Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the SETUP Select

Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

\*NOTICE

To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to SETUP ▶ Phone press "Yes".

VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the 📄 on the steering wheel remote controller. Say a command.

If prompt feedback is in ON en the system will say "Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)"

• If prompt feedback is in OFF mode, then the system will only say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback ON OFF, go to SETUP ▶ System ▶ Prompt Feedback

NOTICE

For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices

1) Do not store single-name entries (e.g., "Bob", "Mom", "Kim", etc.). Instead, always use full names (including first and last names) for all contacts (e.g., use "Jacob Stevenson" instead of "Dad").
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use "Lieutenant" instead of "Lt." or "Sergeant" instead of "Sgt.").
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance Department" instead of "CFD").

4) Do not use special characters (e.g., "@", "hyphen -", "asterisk *", "ampersand &").
5) If a name is not recognized from the contact list, change it to a more descriptive name (e.g., use "Grandpa Joseph" instead of "Pa Joe").

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated ▶Shortly press the k on the steering remote controller.

The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the "beep", say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command ▶ Shortly press the 📁 on the steering remote controller.

The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will sound. After the "beep", say the voice command.

* Illustration on using voice commands

- Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds):

graph TD
    A["Car"] --> B["Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)"]
    B --> C["Ding~"]
    C --> D["More Help"]

More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Music', or 'iPod®'. Additionally, there are phone commands like "Contacts", 'Call History', or 'Dial Number'. You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual. Please say a command after the beep.

• Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds) :

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds):

More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Music', or 'iPod®'. Additionally, there are phone commands like "Contacts", 'Call History', or 'Dial Number'. You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual. Please say a command after the beep.

- Ending voice command.

Shortly pressing the ⚡ (under 0.8 seconds) :

Voice Command List

- Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)

Command Function

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode.

CallCallssaved in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith"

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

CallCallest Hometo the number that is saved as "Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

CallCallesto the number that is saved as "Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say "Favorites", "Dial Number", "Call History" or "Contacts" execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Command Function

Contacts Displays (Call by Name)	the Contacts screen. After saying this command, say the name of a contact saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number	Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call.
Redial	Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial	Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
Radio	When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen.(FM1→FM2→AM→SAT1→SAT2→SAT3→FM1)When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played radio screen.When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)	Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)	Displays the FM2 screen.
AM	Displays the AM screen.
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6	Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
SIRIUS (Satellite)	When currently listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
SIRIUS Displays the selected SiriusXM ® screen.(Satellite) 1~3
SIRIUS Plays the selected SiriusXM ® channel.Channel 0~223
Media Moves to the most recently played media screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod®	Plays iPod® music.

Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio	Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® device.
Mute	Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit)	Ends voice command.

• FM/AM radio Commands : Available during FM, AM radio operation

Command Function

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current present and plays for 10 seconds each.

- Satellite radio Commands: Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function
Channel 0~223	Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays	the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.

• Audio CD Commands : Commands available during Audio CD operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused track.

Pause Pauses the current track.

Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

- MP3 CD and USB Commands : Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation

Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.
Next Folder Play	s the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder	Plays the first file in the previous folder.

- iPod® Commands : Commands available during iPod® operation

Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Shuffle Randomly	plays the songs within the current category.
Shuffle Off Cancels	s random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels	repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

- My Music Commands : Commands available during My Music operation

Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.
Delete	Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.

SETUP

Starting Mode

Press the SETUP display the Setup screen.

You can select and control options related to Display, Sound, Clock/Calendar, Phone and System.

Display Settings

Adjusting the Brightness

Press the SETUP Select Display ▶ Select Brightness

Use the 🔊 b wings to adjust the screen brightness or set the Brightness on Automatic, Day, or Night mode.

Press the Default to reset.

1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the brightness on high
3) Night: Always maintains the brightness on low

Mode Pop up

Press the SETUP Select Display ▶ Select Mode Pop up

This feature is used to display the Mode Pop up screen when entering radio and media modes.

When this feature is turned on, pressing RADIO MEDIA will display the Mode Pop up screen.

key

\* NOTICE

The media Mode Pop up screen can be displayed only when two or more media modes have been connected.

MP3 Information Display

Press the SETUP Select Display ▶ Select Media Display

This feature is used to change the information displayed within USB and MP3 CD modes.

1) Folder File : Displays file name and folder name.
2) Album Artist Song : Displays album name/artist name/song name.

Sound Settings

Sound Settings

Press the SETUP Select Sound ▶ Select Sound Setting

Use the ▶ ▶ ▶ ▼ buttons adjust the Fader/Balance settings. Use the ▶ buttons to adjust the Bass/Middle/Treble settings. Press the Default to reset.

t

SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Control)

Press the SETUP Select Sound ▶ Select Speed Dependent Vol.

The volume level is controlled automatically according to the vehicle speed. SDVC can be set by selecting from On/Off.

Turn the ⒶUNE knob to adjust the Voice Recognition volume.

This feature is used to turn the touch screen beep on/off.

Clock/Calendar Setting

Clock Settings

Press the SETUP Select Clock/Calendar ▶ Select Clock Settings

Use the ▲ b▼ons to set the Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.

\*NOTICE

Press and hold the CLOCKver 0.8 seconds) to display the Clock/ Calendar screen.

Calendar Settings

Use the ▲ b▼ons to set the Day, Month and Year setting.

Time Format

This feature is used to change the clock format between 12hr or 24hr.

Clock Display

This feature is used to display a clock on the screen when the audio system is turned off.

System Setting

Memory Information

This feature displays information related to system memory.

1) Using : Displays capacity currently in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity

Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to select the desired prompt feedback option from ON and OFF.

1) ON: When using voice recognition, provides detailed guidance prompts
2) OFF: When using voice recognition, omits some guidance prompts

Language

This feature is used to change the system and voice recognition language.

If the language is changed, the system will restart and apply the selected language.

REAR VIEW CAMERA (if equipped)

• The system has been equipped with a rear view camera for user safety by allowing a wider rear range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automatically operate when the ignition key is turned ON and the transmission shift lever is positioned into reverse (R).
• The rear view camera will automatically stop operating when set to a the transmission shift lever is positioned to another gear.

CAUTION

The rear view camera has been equipped with an optical lens to provide a wider range of vision and may appear different from the actual distance. For safety, directly check the rear and left/right sides.

iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device sold separately. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change.

Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Android ^™ is a trademark of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

FCC

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authority to operate this equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20cm between the and your body. This transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the FCC.

Standard Audio System

■ Type A-1

(equipped with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology)

■ Type A-2

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND FUNCTIONS

*Display and settings may differ depending on the selected audio.

Audio Head Unit

(1) △ (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.

(2) RADIO

Changes to FM/AM/SIRIUS®mode. Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 → FM2 → AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3.

* In Setup ▶Display, the radio pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned .On When the pop up screen is displayed, use the CUNE knob or keys 1 \~ 6 to select desired mode.

(3) MEDIA

Changes to CD, USB(iPod ^® ), AUX, My Music, BT Audio mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

* In Setup ▶Display, the media pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned On When the pop up screen is displayed, use the ⒽUNE knob or keys 1 \~ 5 to select desired mode.

(4) PHONE

Operates Phone Screen

*When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is displayed.

(5) √ SEEK TRACK

Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.

CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes

- Short the press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to next or previous song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

BT Audio mode : Moves to next or previous song(file)

*The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

(6) POWER/VOL knob

Power : Tums power On/Off by pressing the knob

○ Volume : Sets volume by turning the knob left/right

(7) DISP

Each time the button is shortly pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it sets the screen Off → Screen On → Screen Off

* Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off. In the screen Off state, press any key to turn the screen On again.

(8) SCAN

Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key : Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 6 for 5 seconds each.

*Press the SCAN again to continue listening to the current frequency.

*SAT Radio does not support the Preset scan feature.

CD, USB, My Music mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.

*Press the SCAN again to continue listening to the current song (file).

(9) SETUP/CLOCK

Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds): Moves to the Display, Sound, Clock, Phone, System setting modes Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Move to the Time setting screen

(10) MENU

Displays menus for the current mode.

* iPod® List : Move to parent category

(11) CAT FOLDER

Radio Mode®

- SIRIUS® RADIO : Category Search MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search

(12) TUNE knob

Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.

CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode : Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.

*When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song.

Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

(13) 1 \~ 6 (Preset)

Radio Mode : Saves frequencies (channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)

CD, USB, iPod ^® , My Music mode

- 1 RPT : Repeat

- 2 RDM : Random

In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected.

■ Type A-2

(14) SAT

Changes to SIRIUS ^® Satellite Radio mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3.

(15) MEDIA

Changes to CD, USB(iPod ¹⁴⁰ ), AUX mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod ^® ), AUX.

*In Setup ▶Display, the media pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned.

When the pop up screen is displayed, use the ☐UNE knob or keys 1 \~ 6 to select desired mode.

(16) √ SEEK TRACK

Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.

CD, USB, iPod ^® modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to next or previous song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

*The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

(17) SCAN

Radio Mode

• Shortly press the key : Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 6 for 5 seconds each.

*Press the key again to continue listening to the current frequency.

*SAT Radio does not support the Preset scan feature.

CD, USB mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.

*Press the SCAN again to continue listening to the current song (file).

(18) TUNE knob

Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.

CD, USB, iPod® mode : Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.

*When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song. Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

SETUP

Display Settings

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes OffOn selection mode

- During On state, press the RADIO or MEDIA display the mode change pop up screen.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from 'Folder/File' or 'Album/Artist/Song'.

SOUND SETTINGS

Press the SETUP/CLOCK ▶ [Sound] through ○TUNE knob or 2 RDM key ▶ Select menu through ○ TUNE knob

Sound Settings

This menu allows you to set the 'Bass, Middle, Treble' and the Sound Fader and Balance.

Select [Sound Settings]▶ Select menu through ○ TUNE knob▶ Turn ○ TUNE knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
  *Back : While adjusting values, pressing the ⒽTUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automatically control the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]▶Set [Off/On] of ○ TUNE knob

Voice Recognition Volume (if equipped)

Adjusts voice recognition volume. Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]▶Set volume of ●TUNE knob

CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Clock] through ⭕UNE knob or 3 key▶Select menu through ⭕UNE knob

Clock Settings

This menu is used to set the time. Select [Clock Settings] Set through TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

*Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the tune knob to set the [minute] and [AM/PM].

Calendar Settings

This menu is used to set the date (MM/DD/YYYY).

Select [Calendar Settings] Set through TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

*Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the tune knob to move to the next setting. (Set in order of Month/Day/Year)

Time Format

This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system. Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through ● TUNE knob.

Clock Display when Power is OFF

Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)▶Set ○/○Off● through ● TUNE knob ○ On : Displays time/date on screen ○ Off : Turn off.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the SETUP/CLOCK Select [System] ▶ Select menu through ○ TUNE knob

Memory Information (if equipped)

Displays currently used memory and total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side.

Prompt Feedback (if equipped)

This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes.

Select [Prompt Feedback] ▶ Set through ⬙ TUNE knob

- On : This mode is for beginner users and provides detailed instructions during voice command operation.

- Off: This mode is for expert users and omits some information during voice command operation. (When using Expert mode, guidance instructions can be heard through the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language

This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language.

Select [Language]▶ Set through ● TUNE knob

*The system will reboot after the language is changed.

*Language support by region

- English, Francais, Espanol

RADIO : FM, AM or SIRIUS®

FM1		USB	12:00
87.5	1	87.5	4 104.1
88.1	2		5 108.0
98.1	3		6 87.5

SEEK

Press the

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Automatically searches for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): While holding the key, frequency changes without stopping. When the key is released, automatically searches for the next frequency from that point.

Preset SEEK

Press

key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from 1
  6 will save the currently playing broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SCAN

Press the SCAN

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. After scanning all frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 \~ 6 for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manual search

Turn the ○ TUNE knob left/right to adjust the frequency.

• FM : Changes by 200kHz
• AM : Changes by 10kHz

MENU

Within MENU key are the A.Store (Auto Store) and Info functions.

① A.Store

Press the MENU key▶Set [A.Store] through ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT key. Saves broadcasts with superior reception 1 6 keys. If frequencies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels:

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio has over 130 channels, including 69 channels of 100% commercial-free music, plus sports, news, talk and entertainment available nationwide in your vehicle. For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS® Satellite Radio channels, visit sirius.com in the United States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS® at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

- Antenna obstructions : For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

- Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio service:

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS® Satellite Radio system include :

• Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to SIRIUS® music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS® at 1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:

Sirius XM service requires a subscription, sold separately, after 3-month trial included with vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your Sirius XM service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call Sirius XM at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See our Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. Programming subject to change. Sirius satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C., and PR (with coverage limitations). Traffic information not available in all markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for details. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

SIRIUS® RADIO

Using SIRIUS® Satellite Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3 month complimentary period of SIRIUS® Satellite Radio so you have access to over 130 channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate your subscription to SIRIUS® Satellite Radio, you will need to contact SIRIUS® Customer Care at 800-643-2112. Have your 12 digit SID (Sirius Identification Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial Number) ready. To retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the radio, press the RADIO and tune to channel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activation signal.

SEEK

Press the RADIO

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Select previous or next channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Continuously move to previous or next channel.
  * If the "Category" icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

SCAN

Press the ▶ SCANR

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each
  *Press the SCAN again to continue listening to the current frequency
  *If the "Category" icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

Category

Press the CAT FOLDER through the TUNE knob

• The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press the ⬆FOLDER^ key to navigate category list.
• Press the tune knob to select the lowest channel in the highlighted category.
  If channel is selected by selecting category, then the "CATEGORY" icon is displayed at the top of the screen.

Preset

Press the RADIO ▶ 1 6

- Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.

- Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from 1 6 will save the current broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

\*Troubleshooting

1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult with your Kia dealership.

2. Acquiring Signal

If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SIRIUS ^® Satellite Radio signal is not available. Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky.

Tune

• Rotate 📊TUNE knob : Changes the channel number or scrolls category list.
• Press ⓊTUNE knob : Selects the menu.

Menu

Select category menu through the TUNE knob ▶ Press the MENU key ▶ Select [1Info] through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT key

Info (Information)

Displays the Artist/Song info of the current song.

BASIC METHOD OF USE : Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / iPod® / My Music

Press the MEDIA change the mode in order of CD → USB(iPod®) → AUX → My Music → BT Audio.

The folder/file name is displayed on the screen.

*The CD is automatically played when a CD is inserted.

*The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

Repeat

While song (file) is playing ▶ 1 RPT (RPT) key

Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode : RPT on screen

• To repeat one song (press the key) : Repeats the current song.

MP3 CD, USB mode : FLD.RPT on screen

• To repeat folder (pressing twice) : repeats all files within the current folder.

*Press the 1 RPT again to turn off repeat.

Random

While song (file) is playing ▶ 2 RDM (RDM) key

Audio CD, My Music mode : RDM on screen

- Random (press the key) : Plays all songs in random order.

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen

• Folder Random (press the key) : Plays all files within the current folder in random order.
  iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays all files in random order.
  MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice) : Plays all files in random order.
  * Press the 2 _RDM again to turn off random.

Changing Song/File

While song (file) is playing ▶ SEEK key √ TRACK

• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the current song from the beginning.
  *If the ▼ SEEK TRACK pressed again within 2 seconds, the previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Rewinds the song.

While song (file) is playing▶ SEEK TRACK key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Fast forwards the song.

Scan

While song (file) is playing ▶ SCAN key

• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all songs from the next song for 10 seconds each.
  * Press the SCAN again to turn off.
  * The SCAN function is not supported in iPod® mode.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB Mode

While file is playing ▶ CAT FOLDER (Folder Up) key

• Searches the next folder.
  While file is playing ▶ CAT FOLDER (Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
  ※ If a folder is selected by pressing the ⒽUNE knob, the first file within the selected folder will be played.
  *In iPod mode, moves to the Parent Folder.

Searching Songs (File)

• Turning ⒷUNE knob : Searches for songs (files)
• Pressing Ⓐ TUNE knob : Plays selected song (file).

MENU : Audio CD

Press the CD MP3 mode MENU to set the Repeat, Random, Information features.

Repeat

Press the MENU et [ RPT] ① through the 📄TUNE knob or 1 RPT key to repeat the current song. * Press RPT again to turn off.

Random

Press the MENU et [ RDM] ② through the Ⓐ TUNE knob or 2 RDM key to randomly play songs within the current folder. ※ Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU set [Info] ③ through the ○ TUNE knob or 3 key to display information of the current song.

*Press the MENU b turn off info display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the CD MP3 mode MENU to set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder Repeat, All Random, Information, and Copy features.

Repeat

Press the MENU et [ RPT] ① through the ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT key to repeat the current song. ※ Press RPT again to turn off.

Folder Random

Press the MENU t [F,RDM]② through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM key to randomly play songs within the current folder.

* Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat

Press the MENU et [FIRPT] ③ through the TUNE knob or 3 key to repeat songs within the current folder.

* Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random

Press the MENU key Set [A/RDM] through the TUNE knob or 4 key to randomly play all songs within the CD.

* Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU set [Info] ⑤ through the Ⓐ TUNE knob or 5 key to display information of the current song.

* Press the MENU turn off info display.

Copy (if equipped)

Press the MENU et [ Copy] ⑥ through the Ⓐ TUNE knob or 6 key.

This is used to copy the current song into My Music. You can play the copied Music in My Music mode.

*If another key is pressed while copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed.

*If another media is connected or inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX) while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.

*Music will not be played while copying is in progress.

MENU : iPod®

In iPod® mode, press the MENU to set the Repeat, Random, Information and Search features.

Repeat

Press the MENU et [ RPT] ① through the ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT key to repeat the current song.

* Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the MENU et [ RDM] ② through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM key.

Plays all songs within the currently playing category in random order.

* Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU Set [Info] ③ through the ○ TUNE knob or 3 key.

Displays information of the current song.

* Press the MENU turn off info display.

Search

Press the MENU key Set [ Search] through the ○ TUNE knob or 4 key.

Displays iPod® category list.

*Searching iPod® category is MENU key pressed, move to parent category.

MENU : My Music Mode

In My Music mode, press the MENU key to set the Repeat, Random, Information, Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection features.

Repeat

Press the MENU et [ RPT] ① through the ⒶUNE knob or key.

Repeats the currently playing song. *Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the MENU et [ RDM] ② through the 📊PUNE knob or 2 RDM key.

Plays all songs in random order. * Press RDM again to turn random off.

Information

Press the MENU set [▶Info] ③ through the ○ TUNE knob or 3 key.

Displays information of the current song.

*Press the MENU b turn off info display.

Delete

Press the MENU et [Delete]④ through the ⒽUNE knob or key.

Deletes currently playing file. In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song. Deletes file from list.

①Select the file you wish to delete by using the ⒶUNE knob.
②Press the MENU and select the delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All

Press the MENU key▶Set [Del.All] through the TUNE knob or 5 key. Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection

Press the MENU et [ ▶Del.Sel] through the ○ TUNE knob or 6 key.

Songs within My Music are selected and deleted.

①Select the songs you wish to delete from the list.

②After selecting, press MENU and select the delete menu.

My Music

• Even if memory is available, a maximum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
• The same song can be copied up to 1,000 times.
- Memory info can be checked in the System menu of Setup.

AUX

AUX is used to play external MEDIA currently connected with the AUX terminal.

AUX mode will automatically start when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.

If an external device is connected, you can also press the MEDIA change to AUX mode.

* AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

AUX

Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX terminal for use.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology AUDIO

What is Bluetooth® Wireless Technology?

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows devices to be connected in a short distance, including hands-free devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology website at www.Bluetooth.com

Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio features

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio may not be supported depending on the compatibility of your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.

- The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio can be used only when the [Audio Streaming] of Phone is turned On.
  Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Streaming : Press the SETUP/CLOCK keySelect[Phone] ▶ Select [Audio Streaming] through the ○ TUNE knob Set OffOn

Starting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio

• Press the MEDIA change the mode in order of CD → USB → AUX → My Music → BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio will start playing.
  *Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio features

- Play / Stop

Press the ⒶTUNE knob to play and pause the current song.

• Previous / Next song
  Press SEEK TRACK to play previous or next song.
  *The previous song / next song / play / pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.

PHONE

Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone features

- In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.

- If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.

- If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone connection, set the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology power to OFF

Making a call using the Steering-wheel mount controls

(1) VOLUME button/scroll wheel : Raises or lowers speaker volume.

(2) □ton : Places and transfers calls.

(3) ☐ ton : Ends calls or cancels functions.

(4) MUTE button : Mutes the microphone during a call.

(5) 📀 button : Activates voice recognition.

*The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

- Check call history and making calls

① Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the 📞y on the steering remote controller.

② The call history list will be displayed on the screen.

③ Press the 🔔 key again to connect a call to the selected number.

• Redialing the most recently called number

① Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the 📄y on the steering remote controller.

② The most recently called number is redialed.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Device

What is Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone or device with the car audio system for connection. Pairing is necessary to connect and use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Pairing PHONE Key / on the Steering Remote Controller

Ke!

When No Devices have been Paired

1. Press the PHONE the

key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.

1. Select [OK] button to enter the Pair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as shown when searching from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the device
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone), search and select your car audio system.

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

1. After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered. Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device]

1. After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device and confirm.

5.Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, Android™ and Blackberry® phones) may offer an option to allow acceptance of all future Bluetooth connection requests by default." and "Visit http://www.kia.com/#/bluetooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibility list.

- If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the PHONE key or the 📄 on the steering wheel displays the following screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a new device or select [Connect] to connect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select TUNE knob

1. The following steps are the same as those described in the section "When No Devices have been Paired" on the previous page.

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call (Switch to Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Mobile Contacts

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device auto connection

- Bluetooth Audio Streaming

- Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired to the Car Handsfree system.

- Only one Bluetooth® device can be connected at a time.

- Only one Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device can be connected at a time.

- Other devices cannot be paired while a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected.

- Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth audio related features are supported.

- Bluetooth related operations are possible only within devices that support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio device.

- If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

- If the system becomes unstable due to communication errors between the car Handsfree and the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, reset the device by turning off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, the system will be restored.

- After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent once to the mobile phone. Some mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the connection. Refer to your phones user's manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Phone] Select [Phone List]

1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and select [Connect].

Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. The "Change Priority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

Press the SETUP/CLOCK [Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the highest priority, then select [Change Priority] button from the Menu. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority.

- Priority icon will be displayed when the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Disconnecting a Device

Press the [Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and select [Disconnect] button.

Deleting a Device

Press the SETUP/CLOCKS [Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and select [Delete] button.

• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is deleted, the device's call history and contacts data will also be deleted.
  • To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

USING Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected, press the PHONE key to display the Phone menu screen.

1) Fav : Up to 20 frequently used contacts can be saved for easy access.
2) History : Displays the call history list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related settings.

• If you select the [History] button but there is no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button but there is no contacts data stored, a prompt is displayed which asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user's manual.

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen. To accept the call, press 📄 on the steering wheel while the call is incoming.

1) Caller : Displays the other party's name when the incoming caller is saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number

• When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones.
• When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will automatically revert to Private mode.

Favorites

Press the Select [Favorites]

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts can be saved as favorite.

• To save Favorite, contacts should be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not be automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new Favorite.

Call History

Press the PHONE Elect [Call History]

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed.

• Call history may not be saved in the call history list in some mobile phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID will not be saved in the call history list.
• Calling through the call history is not possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not stored in Call History.

Contacts

Press the PHONE Select [Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entries is displayed.

NOTE:

Find a contact in an alphabetical order, press the MENU

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone can be downloaded into the car contacts. Contacts that have been downloaded to the car cannot be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device has been disconnected. (However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.

• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact download feature has been turned off within the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. In addition, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur, check the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.

• The contacts download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth® devices and function support, refer to your phone's user's manual.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Setting

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Pairing a New Device

Press the [Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the "Pairing through Phone Setup" section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

Press the SETUP/CLOCKS [Phone] Select [Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the "Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Connection" section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone Connect/ disconnects currently selected phone
2) Priority : Sets currently selected phone to highest connection priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous screen

• To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone user's manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.

: Downloading Contacts

Press the [Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, a download progress bar is displayed.

• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.
  • Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

Outgoing Volume

Press the SETUP/CLOCKS [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use ⒽUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.

- While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the SEEK TRACK

Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the SETUP/CLOCK ▶ [Phone]▶Select [Bluetooth System Off]

Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

- To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to SETUP/CLOCK and select "Yes".

VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the 📄 y on the steering wheel .Say a command

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the system will say "Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)"

• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode, then the system will only say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback [On]/[Off], go to SETUP/CLOCK ▶ [System] ▶ [Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices

1) Use full names vs. short or single-syllable names (“John Smith” vs. “Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs. “Home”)
2) Avoid using special characters or hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
3) Avoid using acronyms ("In Case Emergency" vs. "ICE")
4) Spell words completely, no abbreviations ("Doctor Goodman" vs. "Dr. Goodman")

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated shortly press the lock on the steering remote controller

The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the "beep", say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command▶ Shortly press the 📄y on the steering remote controller

The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the “beep”, say the voice command.

ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operating

▶Press and hold the 📋 on the steering remote controller

• While using voice command, pressing any steering wheel control or a different key will end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a voice command, say "cancel" or "end" to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a voice command, press and hold the key on the steering wheel to end voice command.

Voice Recognition and Phone Contact Tips:

The Kia Voice Recognition System may have difficulty understanding some accents or uncommon names. When using Voice Recognition to place a call, speak in a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation.

To maximize the use of Voice Recognition, consider these guidelines when storing contacts :

• Use full names vs. short or single syllable names ("John Smith" vs. "Dad", "Smith Residence" vs. "Home")
• Avoid using special characters or hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms ("In Case Emergency" vs. "ICE")
• Spell words completely, no abbreviations ("Doctor Goodman" vs. "Dr. Goodman")

Illustration on using voice commands

- Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the ⚡ (under 0.8 seconds) :

graph TD
    A["Car"] --> B["Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)"]
    B --> C["Beep~"]
    C --> D["More Help"]

• Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the ⚡ (under 0.8 seconds) :

• End voice command.

Shortly pressing the ⚡ (under 0.8 seconds) :

Voice Command List

- Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)

Command Function

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode.

Callssaved in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith"

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say "Favorites", "Call History", "Contacts" or "Dial Number" execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Command Function
Contacts Displays	the Contacts screen. After saying this command, say the name of a contact saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number	Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call.
Redial	Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial	Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition and Bluetooth® connections
Radio	When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen. (FM1→FM2→AM→SAT1→SAT2→SAT3→FM1)When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played radio screen.When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)	Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)	Displays the FM2 screen.
AM	Displays the AM screen.
FM Preset 1~6	Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
SIRIUS®(Satellite)	When listening to the SIRIUS®, maintains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played SIRIUS®screen.
SIRIUS®(Satellite)1~3	Displays the selected SIRIUS®screen.
SIRIUS®Channel0~223	Plays the selected SIRIUS®channel.
Media Moves to	the most recently played media screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod®	Plays iPod®music.

Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio	Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® device.
Please repeat	Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute	Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit)	Ends voice command.

- FM/AM radio commands : Commands available during FM, AM radio operation.

Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays	the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable	frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current present and plays for 10 seconds each.

- Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function
Channel 0~223	Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays	the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.

- Audio CD commands : Commands available during Audio CD operation.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

- MP3 CD / USB commands : Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays the files within the current folder.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.

Information Displays the information screen of the current file.

Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.

Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.

- iPod® Commands : Commands available during iPod® operation.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays the songs within the current category.

Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

- My Music Commands : Commands available during My Music operation.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays all saved files.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.

Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands : Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.

iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device sold separately. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology. Sirius XM® service requires a subscription, sold separately, after 3-month trial included with vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your Sirius XM® service at the end of the trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at the current rates until you call Sirius XM® at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See our Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. Sirius satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., and P.R. (with coverage limitations). Sirius XM® Traffic available in select markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for more information. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark of Google, Inc. BlackBerry® is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited (RIM).

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

FCC Warning

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authority to operate this equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Standard Audio System

System Controllers and Functions

Audio Head Unit

1.

- Ejects the disc.

2. RADIO

• Converts to Radio mode.
  • Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM, SAT1, SAT2, SAT3.

3. MEDIA

• Converts to Media mode.
  • Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

4. PHONE

• Converts to Phone mode
  * When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is displayed.

5. POWER/VOL knob

• Power : Press to turn power on/off.
• Volume :Turn left/right to control volume.

6. SEEK TRACK

• When pressed shortly(under 0.8 seconds)
• Radio mode : plays previous/next frequency.
• Media (CD /USB /iPod®/My Music) modes : changes the track, Song(file)
• When pressed and held (Over 0.8 seconds)
• Radio mode : continuously changes the frequency. Upon release, plays the current frequency.
• Media(CD /USB /iPod®/My Music) modes : rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
• During a Handsfree call, controls the call volume.

7. CAT FOLDER

• SIRIUS® RADIO : Category Search
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search Folder

8. DISP

- Turns the monitor display on/off.

9. CLOCK

- Shortly press the key(under 0.8 seconds): Display time screen

- Press and hold the key(over 0.8 seconds): Move to the time setting mode

10. SCAN

• Radio mode : previews all receivable broadcasts for 5 seconds each
  • Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes: previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.

11. SETUP

- Converts to Setup mode.

12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast frequencies.
  • Media (CD/USB/iPo®/My Music) modes : turn to search Tracks/channels/files.

13. RESET

- Forced system termination and system restart.

Steering remote controller

* The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. MUTE

- Mutes the microphone during a call.

2. MODE

• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 → FM2 → AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3 → CD → USB(iPod®) → AUX → My Music → BT Audio

- If the media is not connected or a disc is not inserted, corresponding modes will be disabled.

3. VOLUME

• Used to control volume.

4.

- When pressed shortly

- When pressed in the phone screen, displays call history screen

- When pressed in the dial screen, makes a call

- When pressed in the incoming call screen, answers the call

- When pressed during call waiting, switches to waiting call (Call Waiting)

- When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)

- When pressed in the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree wait mode, redials the last call

- When pressed during a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree call, switches call back to mobile phone (Private)

- When pressed while calling on the mobile phone, switches call back to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree (Operates only when Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree is connected)

5.

- Ends phone call

6.

- When pressed shortly

- Starts voice recognition - When selecting during a voice prompt, stops the prompt and converts to voice command waiting state

- When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)

- Ends voice recognition

RADIO MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display Displays currently operating mode.

2. Frequency Displays the current frequency.

3. Preset Displays current preset number 1 \~ 6.

4. Preset Display Displays preset buttons.

5. A.Store Automatically saves frequencies with superior reception to Preset buttons.

Switching to Radio Mode

Pressing the RADIO I change the operating mode in order of FM1 → FM2 → AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3

If Mode Pop up on within SETUP ▶ Display, then pressing the RADIO key will display the Radio Pop-up Mode screen.

Turn the ⒶTUNE knob to move the focus. Press the knob to select.

Searching Radio Frequencies

Using Seek

Press the SEEK TRACK play the previous/next frequency.

Using TUNE

Turn the ⒽUNE knob to select the desired frequency.

Using Radio Mode

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the Presetn to display the broadcast information for the frequency saved to each button.

Press the 1 buttons to play the desired preset.

\*NOTICE

While listening to a frequency you want to save as a preset, press and hold one of the 1 pre 6 buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the current frequency to the selected preset.

Auto Store

Press the A.Store to automatically save receivable frequencies to Preset buttons.

Scan

Press the SCAN preview frequencies with superior reception for 5 seconds each.

Press and hold the SCAN er 0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5 seconds each.

Once scan is complete, the previous frequency will be restored. While Scan is operating, pressing the SCAN key will cancel the scan operation.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the Sirius Select package. You'll get over 140 channels, including commercial-free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selection of premium programming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

- Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and

other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

- Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include:

- Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

- For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:

SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

SiriusXM RADIO MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display Displays currently operating mode.
2. Channel Information Displays the category, channel number, channel name, artist and title information.
3. Preset Displays current playing preset number 1 \~ 6 .
4. Preset Display Displays saved presets.
5. Info Displays detailed information about the current broadcast.

Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-month trial subscription to SiriusXM so you have access to over 140 channels channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate your Sirius Select subscription, you will need to contact SiriusXM Customer Care at 800-643-2112. Have your 12-digit RID (Radio Identification Number) / ESN (Electro-nic Serial Number) ready. To retrieve the RID / ESN, turn on the radio, press the RADIO key, and tune to channel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activation signal.

Using SEEK

Press the ▼ SEEK ▲ play the previous/next channel.

* If the "Category" icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

Using Tune

Turn the ⒶUNE knob to select the desired channel.

SCAN

Press the SCAN scan all channels with superior reception for 5 seconds each.

Once scan is complete, the previously played channel will be restored.

During Scan, pressing the SCAN key again will cancel the scan operation and restore the previously played channel.

If the "Category" icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

Searching Categories

Select the category by using the Ⓗ FOLDER key and press the Ⓗ UNE knob to select.

Channels for the selected category are played.

\*TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult with your Kia dealership.

2. No Signal

If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SIRIUS® Satellite Radio signal is not available. Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky.

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the Preset in to display the broadcast information for the channel saved to each button.

Press the 6\~ buttons the desired preset.

NOTICE

While listening to a channel you want to save as a preset, press and hold one of the 1 \~ 6 preset buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the current channel to the selected preset.

\*NOTICE - USING CDs

• This device has been manufactured to be compatible with software bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical solutions, such as record sprays, antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids, benzene, or thinners.
  • After using a disc, put the disc back in its original case to prevent disc scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within the center hole to prevent damages to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances into the disc insert/eject slot. Introducing foreign substances could damage the device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs, differences in disc reading and playing times may occur depending on the disc manufacturer, production method and the recording method as used by the user.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Clean fingerprints and dust off the disc surface (coated side) with a soft cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs attached with labels may result in disc slot jams or difficulties in disc removal. Such discs may also result in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not properly operate depending on the disc manufacturer, production method and the record method as used by the user. If problems persist, trying using a different CD as continued use may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product may differ depending on the CD-RW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type CDs may not function in the device. DATA discs cannot be played. (However, such discs may still operate but will do so abnormally.)
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use abnormally shaped discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped) as such discs could lead to malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc slot without removal for 10 seconds, the disc will automatically be re-inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in recognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)

MEDIA MODE

Pressing the MEDIA I change the operating mode in order of CD → USB(iPod®) → AUX → My Music → BT Audio.

If Mode Pop up on within

SETUP ▶ Display, then pressing the MEDIA key will display the Media Mode Pop up screen.

Turn the 📄TUNE knob to move the focus. Press the knob to select.

\*NOTICE

- The media Mode Pop up screen can be displayed only when there are two or more media modes turned on.

Title Icon

When a Bluetooth ^® Wireless Technology, iPod ^® , USB, or AUX device is connected or a CD is inserted, the corresponding mode icon will be displayed.

CD
Icon	Title
	Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
	CD
	iPod®
	USB
	AUX

AUDIO CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the currently operating function.

3. Track Info Displays information about the current track.

4. Play/Pause Changes the play/pause state.

5. Play Time Displays the current play time.

6. Info Shows detailed information about the current track.

7. Shuffle Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.

8. Repeat Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

9. List Moves to the list screen.

Using Audio CD Mode

Playing/Pausing CD Tracks

Once an audio CD is inserted, the mode will automatically start and begin playing.

While playing, press the button to pause and press button to play.

\*NOTICE

• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information are displayed on the screen if track information is included within the audio CD.

Changing Tracks

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next track.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK after the track has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current track from the beginning.
• Pressing the 12 SEEK before the track has been playing for 1 second will start the previous track.

Selecting from the List

Turn the ⒶTUNE knob left/right to search for the desired track.

Once you find the desired track, press the ⒽTUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current track.

Scan

Press the SCAN play the first 10 seconds of each file.

Audio CD Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat and List features.

Info

Press the Infoton to display details about the current disc.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle n to play tracks in shuffle order.

Press the Shuffle again to turn the Shuffle feature off.

- Shuffle : Plays all tracks in shuffle order.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current track. Press the button again to turn the repeat feature off.

- Repeat: Repeats the current track.

List

Press the bList on to display the track list screen.

Turn the 📄TUNE knob left/right to search for tracks. Once the desired track is displayed, press the knob to select and play.

MP3 CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode
   Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
   From Repeat /Shuffle /Scan, displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index
   Displays the current file number.

4. File Info

Displays information about the current file.

1. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

1. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

1. Info

Shows detailed information about the current file.

1. Shuffle
   Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
2. Repeat
   Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
3. Copy
   Copies the current file into My Music
4. List
   Moves to the list screen.

Using MP3 CD Mode

Playing/Pausing MP3 Files

Once an MP3 disc is inserted the mode will automatically start and being playing.

While playing, press the 🔊! ton to pause and press 🔊! ton to play.

NOTICE

If there are numerous files and folders within the disc, reading time could take more than 10 seconds and the list may not be displayed or song searches may not operate. Once loading is complete, try again.

Changing Files

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next file.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the beginning.
• Pressing the SEEK TRACK before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the ⒽTUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the ⒹDUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the SCAN play the first 10 seconds of each file.

Searching Folders

Press the CAT FOLDER lect and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed, press the 📊TUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.

MP3 CD Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat, Copy and List features.

Info

Press the Infoton to display details about the current file.

\*NOTICE

• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as the default display within Display setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option is set as the default display, the folder name/file name are displayed as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are displayed only when such information are recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle to play files in shuffle order.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Shuffle Folder → Shuffle All → Off.

• Shuffle Folder : Plays all files within the current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle order.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current file or folder.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Repeat → Repeat Folder → Off.

• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within the current Folder.

Copying Files

Press the Copy button to copy the current file into My Music.

\*NOTICE

Selecting another feature during copying will display a pop-up asking whether you wish to cancel copying. To cancel, select "Yes".

List

Press the bList on to display the file list screen.

Turn the ⒶUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play.

\*NOTICE - USING THE USB DEVICE

• Connect the USB device after turning on the engine. The USB device may become damaged if it is already connected when the ignition is turned on. The USB device may not operate properly if the car ignition is turned on or off with the USB device connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity when connecting/disconnecting USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be recognized when connected as an external device.
• When connecting an external USB device, the device may not properly recognize the USB is in some states.
• Only products formatted with byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file formats. This device does not recognize files in NTFS file format.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some USB devices may not be supported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB connector with bodily parts or foreign objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting of USB devices within short periods of time may result in product malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect external USB devices with the audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to recognize the USB device may differ depending on the type, size or file formats stored in the USB. Such differences in time are not indications of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use the USB I/F to charge batteries or USB accessories that generate heat. Such acts may lead to worsened performance or damage to the device.
• The device may not recognize the USB device if separately purchased USB hubs and extension cables are being used. Connect the USB directly with the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB devices with separate logical drives, only files saved to the root drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate if application programs are installed to the USBs.
• The device may not operate normally if MP3 Players, cellular phones, digital cameras, or other electronic devices (USB devices not recognized as portable disk drives) are connected with the device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Charging through the USB may not work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB Memory.
• The device may not support normal operation when using formats such as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
• The device will not support files locked by DRM (Digital Rights Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by connecting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF Type) may not be properly recognized.
• The device may not operate properly when using USB HDDs or USBs subject to connection failures caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-stick type)

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Avoid use of USB memory products that can also be used as key chains or mobile phone accessories. Use of such may cause damage to the

- Connecting an MP3 device or phone through various channels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USB mode may result in pop noises or abnormal operation.

USB MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

1. Operation State

From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the currently operating function.

1. File Index

Displays the current file number.

1. File Info

Displays information about the current file.

1. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

1. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

1. Info

Displays detailed information for the current file.

1. Shuffle

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.

1. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

1. Copy

Copies the current file into My Music.

1. List

Moves to the list screen.

Using USB Mode

Playing/Pausing USB Files

Once a USB is connected, the mode will automatically start and begin playing a USB file.

While playing, press the 11 ton to pause and press 10 ton to play.

\*NOTICE

• Loading may require additional time if there are many files and folders within the USB and result in faulty list display or file searching. Normal operations will resume once loading is complete.
• The device may not support normal operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB Memory.

Changing Files

Press the ✅ SEEK TRACK ↗ move to the previous or next file.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK TRACK after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the beginning.
• Pressing the 12 SEEK TRACK before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the ⒶUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the ⒶUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the SCAN play the first 10 seconds of each file.

Searching Folders

Press the CAT FOLDER elect and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed, press the ⓊTUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.

USB Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat, Copy and List features.

Info

Press the Infoton to display details about the current file.

\*NOTICE

• When the 'Folder File' option is set as the default display within Display setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option is set as the default display, the folder name/file name are displayed as detailed file information.
  •The title, artist and album info are displayed only when such information are recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.

Shuffle

Press the Shufflen to play files in shuffle order.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Shuffle Folder → Shuffle All → Off.

• Shuffle Folder : Plays the files in the current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle order.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current file or folder.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Repeat→ Repeat Folder → Off.

• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files within the current folder.

Copying Files

Press the Copy to copy the current file into My Music.

\*NOTICE

Selecting another feature during copying will display a pop-up asking whether you wish to cancel copying. To cancel, select "Yes".

List

Press the bList to display the file list screen.

Turn the 📄TUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play.

\*NOTICE - USING THE iPod® DEVICE

• iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod while operating the keys, you must use a dedicated iPod cable. (the cable that is supplied when purchasing iPod /iPhone products)
• If the iPod is connected to the vehicle while it is playing, a high pitch sound could occur for approximately 1-2 seconds immediately after connecting. If possible, connect the iPod to the vehicle with the iPod stopped/paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting the iPod through the iPod cable will charge the iPod through the car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod® cable, make sure to fully insert the jack to prevent communication interference.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When the EQ features of an external device, such as the iPod®, and the audio system are both active, EQ effects could overlap and cause sound deterioration and distortion. Whenever possible, turn off the EQ feature within the external device upon use by connecting with the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod or AUX device is connected. When such devices are not being used, disconnect the device for storage.
• When the iPod or AUX device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may result in noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use.
• Skipping or improper operation may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod® /iPhone® device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If your iPhone® is connected to both the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and USB, the sound may not be properly played. In your iPhone®, select the Dock connector or Bluetooth® Wireless Technology to change the sound output (source).
• iPod® mode cannot be operated when the iPod® cannot be recognized due to versions that do not support communication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod® Nano devices, the iPod® may not be recognized when the battery level is low. Please charge the iPod® for use.
• Search/play orders shown within the iPod® device may differ with the orders shown within the audio system.
• If the iPod® malfunctions due to an iPod® device defect, reset the iPod® and try again. (To learn more, refer to your iPod® manual)

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some iPod® may not sync with the System depending on its version. If the Media is removed before the Media is recognized, then the system may not properly restore the previously operated mode. (iPad® charging is not supported.)
• Beside support 1M cable when purchasing iPod/iPhone products, Long Cable cannot be recognized.

iPod® MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode
   Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
   From Repeat/Shuffle, displays the currently operating function.

3. Song Index
   Displays the current song/total number of songs.

4. Song Info
   Displays information about the current song.

5. Play/Pause
   Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
   Displays the current play time.
7. Shuffle
   Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
8. Repeat
   Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
   Moves to the list screen.

Using iPod® Mode

Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs

Once an iPod ^® is connected, the mode will automatically start and begin playing an iPod ^® song.

While playing, press the button to pause and press button to play.

NOTICE

iPod® with unsupported communication protocols may not properly operate in the audio system.

Changing Songs

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next song.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK after the song has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current song from the beginning.
• Pressing the 🎨 SEEK TRACK before the song has been playing for 1 second will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist depending your iPod® product.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs

While playing, press and hold the √ SEEK TRACK ∧ key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current song.

Searching Categories

Turn the ⒶUNE knob left/right to search for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category, press the ⒹUNE knob to select and play.

\*NOTICE

There are eight categories that can be searched, including Playlists, Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers, Audiobooks and Podcasts.

Category Menu

Within the iPod® Category menu, you will have access to the Home and features.

1. plays the play screen
2. Home es to the iPod ® root cat-egory screen
3. Moves to the previous category

\*NOTICE

• If the search mode is accessed while playing a song, the most recently searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection may differ depending on the type of iPod® device.

iPod® Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Shuffle, Repeat and List features.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle n to play songs in shuffle order.

Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of Shuffle All → Off → Shuffle All.

- Shuffle All : Plays all songs in shuffle order.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current song. Press the button again to turn the repeat feature off.

- Repeat: Repeats the current song

List

Press the List on to display the Category Menu.

Turn the ⒶUNE knob left/right to search for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category, press the Ⓞ TUNE knob to select and play.

AUX MODE

Using AUX Mode

An external device can be connected to play music.

Connecting an External Device

External audio players (Camcorders, car VCR, etc.) can be played through a dedicated cable.

\*NOTICE

• If an external device connector is connected with the AUX terminal, then AUX mode will automatically operate. Once the connector is disconnected, the previous mode will be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when an external audio player (camcorder, car VCR, etc.) has been connected.
  • The AUX volume can be controlled separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the AUX terminal without an external device will convert the system to AUX mode, but only output noise. When an external device is not being used, also remove the connector jack.
• When the external device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may output noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX jack upon use.

MY MUSIC MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the currently operating function.
3. File Index Displays the current file/total number of files.
4. File Info Displays information about the current file.
5. Play/Pause Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time Displays the current play time.

7. Info Displays detailed information for the current file.

8. Shuffle Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.

9. Repeat Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Delete Deletes the current file.
11. List Moves to the list screen.

Using My Music Mode

Playing/Pausing My Music Files

While playing, press the 11 ton to pause and press 1 ton to play.

NOTICE

If there are no files saved within My Music, the My Music will be disabled.

Changing Files

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next file.

\*NOTICE

• Pressing the SEEK after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the beginning.
• Pressing the SEEK TRACK before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the ⒶTUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the ⒶTUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the SCAN play the first 10 seconds of each file.

My Music Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat, Delete and List features.

Info

Press the Info on to display details about the current file.

\*NOTICE

The title, artist and album info are displayed only when such information is recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle to play files in shuffle order. Press the button again to turn the Shuffle feature off.

Repeat

Press the Repeat to repeat the current song. Press the button again to turn the repeat feature off.

Deleting Files

Press the Delete to delete the current file.

List

Press the bList on to display the file list screen.

Turn the ⒶUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play.

List Menu

From the List screen, it is possible to delete files you previously saved into My Music.

Press the Select All individually select the files you want to delete. Once files are selected, the Unselect All button and Delete will be enabled.

1) moves to the previous screen
2) Select All : Selects all files
3) Unselect All : Deselects all selected files
4) Delete : Deletes selected files

After selecting the files you want to delete, press the Delete to delete the selected files.

\*NOTICE

• If there is memory available, up to 6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to SETUP ▶ Memory InformationS

\*NOTICE - USING THE Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode can be used only when a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode will not be available when connecting mobile phones that do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio is playing, if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is connected, then the music will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while playing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio mode may result in pop noises in some mobile phones.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology streaming audio may not be supported in some mobile phones.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When returning to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode after ending a call, the mode may not automatically restart in some mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or making an outgoing call while playing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio may result in audio interference.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology AUDIO MODE

Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode

Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio

Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected, the mode will automatically start.

While playing, press the button to pause and press button to play.

\*NOTICE

The play/pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

Changing Files

Press the SEEK TRACK move to the previous or next file.

Setting Connection

If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device has not been connected, press the SETUP key ▶ Phone button display the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection screen.

It is possible to use the pair phone, connect/disconnect and delete features from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone.

②②

\*NOTICE

- If music is not yet playing from your mobile device after converting to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode, pressing the play button once may start playing the mode. Check to see that music is playing from the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device after converting to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode.

to

Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Device

What is Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone or device with the car audio system for connection. Pairing is necessary to connect and use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Pairing Using the PHONE or the Steering Wheel Control Button

When No Devices have been Paired

1. Press the PHONE the key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.
2. Press the OKton to enter the Pair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as shown when searching from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the device
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone), search and select your car audio system.

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

1. After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered.

Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device]

1. After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey.

Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device and confirm.

1. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

\*NOTICE

If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the PHONE key or the KEY on the steering wheel displays the following screen. Press the Pair on to pair a new device or press the Connect ect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

Press the SETUP Select Phone Select Pair Phone Select TUNE knob

1. The following steps are the same as those described in the section "When No Devices have been Paired" on the previous page.

NOTICE

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call (Switch to Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Mobile Contacts

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device auto connection

- Bluetooth Audio Streaming

- Up to five Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices can be paired to the Car Handsfree system.

- Only one Bluetooth Wireless Technology device can be connected at a time.

- Other devices cannot be paired while a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected.

- Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth audio related features are supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Bluetooth related operations are possible only with devices that support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio device.

- If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

- If the system becomes unstable due to communication errors between the car Handsfree and the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, reset the device by turning off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, the system will be restored.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent once to the mobile phone. Some mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the connection. Refer to your phones user's manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device

Press the SETUP Select

1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and press the Connect

Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. The "Change Priority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

Press the SETUP Select

From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the highest priority, then press the Change priority button from the Menu. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority.

NOTICE

Priority icon will be displayed when the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Disconnecting a Device

Press the SETUP Select ▶ Select Paired Phone ListF

From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and press the Disconnect

Deleting a Device

Press the SETUP Select ▶ Select Paired Phone ListP

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and press the Delete button.

\*NOTICE

• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is deleted, the device's call history and contacts data will also be deleted.
  • To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

USING Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected, press the PHONE key to display the Phone menu screen.

1) Favorites : Up to 20 frequently used contacts saved for easy access
2) Dial Number : Displays the dial screen where numbers can be dialed to make calls
3) Call History : Device the call history list screen
4) Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen
5) Setup : Displays Phone related settings.

\*NOTICE

• If you press the Call History but there is no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data.
• If you press the Contacts but there is no contacts data stored, a prompt is displayed which asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user's manual.

Favorites

Press the PHONE Select

Favorites

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.
3) Delete All : Delete all stored favorite contacts

NOTICE

• To save Favorite, contacts should be downloaded.
- Contact saved in Favorites will not be automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new Favorite.

Calling by Dialing a Number

Press the PHONE Select Dial Number

1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone number
2) Call : If a number has been entered, calls the number If no number has been entered, switches to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers one digit at a time

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.

1) Caller : Displays the other party's name when the incoming caller is saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number
3) Accept : Accepts the incoming call
4) Reject : Rejects the incoming call

\*NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones.
• When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will automatically revert to Private mode.

During a Handsfree Call

1) Caller : Displays the other party's name if the incoming caller is saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard by the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off

\*NOTICE

If the mic is muted, the other party will not be able to hear your voice.

Call History

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed.

Press the Download to download the call history.

1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call History

• Call history may not be saved in the call history list in some mobile phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID will not be saved in the call history list.
• Calling through the call history is not possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not saved.

Contacts

Press the PHONE Select Contacts

The list of saved phone book entries is displayed. Press the Download ton to download the call history.

1) Contacts List :

• Displays downloaded contacts entries
• Connects call upon selection

2) Sort by : Find a contact in an alphabetical order.

3) Download : Download contacts entries

NOTICE

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone can be downloaded into the car contacts. Contacts that have been downloaded to the car cannot be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device has been disconnected. (However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact download feature has been turned off within the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. In addition, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur, check the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth® devices and function support, refer to your phone's user manual.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Setting

Pairing a New Device

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the "Pairing through Phone Setup" section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the "Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Connection" section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

1) moves to the previous screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/ disconnects currently selected phone
3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone
4) Change priority : Sets currently selected phone to highest connection priority

\*NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-LOADING CONTACTS

• Only contacts within connected phones can be downloaded. Also check to see that your mobile phone supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone user's manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, a download progress bar is displayed.

\*NOTICE

• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

Outgoing Volume

Use the outputs to adjust the outgoing volume level.

\*NOTICE

While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the SEEK TRACK

Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the SETUP Select

▶ Select Bluetooth System OffP

Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

\*NOTICE

To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to SETUP ▶ Phone press "Yes".

VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the 📄 on the steering wheel remote controller. Say a command.

If prompt feedback is in ON en the system will say "Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)"

• If prompt feedback is in OFF mode, then the system will only say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback ON OFF, go to SETUP ▶ System ▶ Prompt Feedback

NOTICE

For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices

1) Do not store single-name entries (e.g., "Bob", "Mom", "Kim", etc.). Instead, always use full names (including first and last names) for all contacts (e.g., use "Jacob Stevenson" instead of "Dad").
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use "Lieutenant" instead of "Lt." or "Sergeant" instead of "Sgt.").
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance Department" instead of "CFD").

4) Do not use special characters (e.g., "@", "hyphen -", "asterisk *", "ampersand &").
5) If a name is not recognized from the contact list, change it to a more descriptive name (e.g., use "Grandpa Joseph" instead of "Pa Joe").

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated ▶Shortly press the k on the steering remote controller.

The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the "beep", say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command ▶ Shortly press the 📁 on the steering remote controller.

The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will sound. After the “beep”, say the voice command.

* Illustration on using voice commands

- Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds):

• Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds):

- Ending voice command.

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds):

graph TD
    A["Car"] --> B["Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)"]
    B --> C["Ding~"]
    C --> D["Contacts"]
    D --> E["Head icon"]
    F["Car"] --> G["Contacts"]
    G --> H["Please say the name of the contacts you want to call (BEEP)"]
    H --> I["Dialog box"]
    I --> J["Cancel"]
    J --> K["Head icon"]
    L["Car"] --> M["Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)"]

Voice Command List

- Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)

Command Function

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode.

CallCallssaved in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith"

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

CallCallsto the number that is saved as "Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

CallCallest Home to the number that is saved as "Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

CallCalleston Other to the number that is saved as "Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say "Favorites", "Dial Number", "Call History" or "Contacts" execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Display s the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Command Function
Contacts Displays (Call by Name)	the Contacts screen. After saying this command, say the name of a contact saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number Display	s the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call.
Redial	Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial	Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
Radio	When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen.(FM1→FM2→AM→SAT1→SAT2→SAT3→FM1)When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played radio screen.When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)	Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)	Displays the FM2 screen.
AM	Displays the AM screen.

Command Function

FM Preset 1~6	Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
SIRIUS®(Satellite)	When currently listening to the SIRIUS®, maintains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played SIRIUS® screen.
SIRIUS®(Satellite) 1~3	Displays the selected SIRIUS® screen.
SIRIUS®Channel 0~223	Plays the selected SIRIUS® channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod®	Plays iPod® music.

Command Function

My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio	Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® device.
Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute	Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit)	Ends voice command.

• FM/AM radio Commands : Available during FM, AM radio operation

Command Function

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current present and plays for 10 seconds each.

- Satellite radio Commands: Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function
Channel 0~223	Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays	the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.

• Audio CD Commands : Commands available during Audio CD operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused track.

Pause Pauses the current track.

Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

- MP3 CD and USB Commands : Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation

Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.
Next Folder Play	s the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Play	s the first file in the previous folder.

- iPod® Commands : Commands available during iPod® operation

Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Shuffle Randomly	plays the songs within the current category.
Shuffle Off Cancels	s random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels	repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

• My Music Commands : Commands available during My Music operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused file.

Pause Pauses the current file.

Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.

Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.

SETUP

Starting Mode

Press the SETUP display the Setup screen.

You can select and control options related to Display, Sound, Clock/Calendar, Phone and System.

Display Settings

Adjusting the Brightness

Press the SETUP Select Display ▶ Select Brightness

Use the ◀ b oons to adjust the screen brightness or set the Brightness on Automatic, Day, or Night mode.

Press the Default to reset.

1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the brightness on high
3) Night: Always maintains the brightness on low

Mode Pop up

Press the SETUP Select Display ▶ Select Mode Pop up

This feature is used to display the Mode Pop up screen when entering radio and media modes.

When this feature is turned on, pressing RADIO MEDIA will display the Mode Pop up screen.

key

\*NOTICE

The media Mode Pop up screen can be displayed only when two or more media modes have been connected.

MP3 Information Display

Press the SETUP Select Display ▶ Select Media Display

This feature is used to change the information displayed within USB and MP3 CD modes.

1) Folder File : Displays file name and folder name.
2) Album Artist Song : Displays album name/artist name/song name.

Sound Settings

Sound Settings

Press the SETUP Select Sound ▶ Select Sound Setting

Use the ▶ ▶ ▶ buttons adjust the Fader/Balance settings. Use the ▶ buttons to adjust the Bass/Middle/Treble settings. Press the Default to reset.

t

SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Control)

Press the SETUP Select Sound ▶ Select Speed Dependent Vol.

The volume level is controlled automatically according to the vehicle speed. SDVC can be set by selecting from On/Off.

Voice Recognition Volume

Press the SETUP Select

Sound ▶ Select Voice Recognition Vol.

Turn the ⒹTUNE knob to adjust the Voice Recognition volume.

Touch Screen Beep

Press the SETUP Select

Sound ▶ Select Touch Screen Beep

This feature is used to turn the touch screen beep on/off.

Clock/Calendar Setting

Clock Settings

Press the SETUP Select

Clock/Calendar ▶ Select Clock Settings

Use the ▲ byons to set the Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.

\*NOTICE

Press and hold the CLOCKver 0.8 seconds) to display the Clock/ Calendar screen.

Calendar Settings

Use the ▲ b▼ons to set the Day, Month and Year setting.

Time Format

This feature is used to change the clock format between 12hr or 24hr.

Clock Display

This feature is used to display a clock on the screen when the audio system is turned off.

System Setting

Memory Information

This feature displays information related to system memory.

1) Using : Displays capacity currently in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity

Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to select the desired prompt feedback option from ON and OFF.

1) ON: When using voice recognition, provides detailed guidance prompts
2) OFF: When using voice recognition, omits some guidance prompts

Language

This feature is used to change the system and voice recognition language.

If the language is changed, the system will restart and apply the selected language.

REAR VIEW CAMERA (if equipped)

• The system has been equipped with a rear view camera for user safety by allowing a wider rear range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automatically operate when the ignition key is turned ON and the transmission shift lever is positioned into reverse (R).
• The rear view camera will automatically stop operating when set to a the transmission shift lever is positioned to another gear.

CAUTION

The rear view camera has been equipped with an optical lens to provide a wider range of vision and may appear different from the actual distance. For safety, directly check the rear and left/right sides.

iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device sold separately. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks

and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Android ^™ is a trademark of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

FCC

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Caution: Any changes or odifications to the equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void user's authority to operate the equipment.

Driving your vehicle

Before driving 5-3

Key positions....5-5

Engine START/STOP button 5-7

- Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button ..... 5-7

• ENGINE START/STOP button position.....5-7

Starting the engine 5-10

Manual transaxle 5-13

- Manual transaxle operation....5-13

Automatic transaxle 5-16

• Automatic transaxle operation....5-16

Brake system....5-22

• Power brakes 5-22

- Parking brake....5-24

• Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 5-26

• Electronic stability control (ESC) 5-27

• Hill-start assist control (HAC) 5-31

• Vehicle stability management (VSM) ..... 5-31

Cruise control system....5-35

ISG (idle stop and go) system ..... 5-40

Active Eco System 5-45

Economical operation 5-46

Special driving conditions ..... 5-48

• Hazardous driving conditions ..... 5-48

• Rocking the vehicle 5-48

- Smooth cornering....5-49

- Driving at night 5-49

- Driving in the rain. 5-50

- Driving in flooded areas 5-50

- Driving off-road....5-51

• Highway driving .... 5-51

Winter driving....5-52

Trailer towing 5-55

Vehicle load limit 5-56

• Tire and loading information label ..... 5-56

• Certification label 5-59

Vehicle weight 5-61

- Base curb weight .... 5-61

- Vehicle curb weight 5-61

- Cargo weight 5-61

• GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-61

• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)....5-61

• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) 5-61

• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) ..... 5-61

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Engine exhaust

Do not inhale exhaust fumes or leave your engine running in a enclosed area for a prolonged time. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

WARNING - Open tailgate

Do not drive with the tailgate open. Poisonous exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment

If you must drive with the tail-gate open proceed as follows:

1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at the highest speed.

WARNING - California proposition 65

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

BEFORE DRIVING

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, with the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in Section 7, "Maintenance".

⚠ WARNING - Distracted driving

Focus on the road while driving. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of the vehicle. Use of any handled devices, other equipment or vehicle systems that distract the drive should not be used during vehicle operation.

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING

- Check surrounding

Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Driving while intoxicated

Do not drive while intoxicated. Drinking and driving is dangerous. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous as or more dangerous than driving drunk.

WARNING - Fire risk

When you intend to park or stop the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire.

WARNING - Loose objects

Securely store items in your vehicle. When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering wheel rapidly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident.

KEY POSITIONS

Close-up of a mechanical knob or dial with a yellow-green center, no visible text or symbols

Illuminated ignition switch (if equipped)

Whenever a front door is opened, the ignition switch will illuminate for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position. The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on. It will also go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

OTD059016OU

Ignition switch position

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect against theft. The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.

The anti-theft steering column lock is not a substitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear for the manual transaxle or P (Park) for automatic transaxle, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative. If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

ON

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked in this position.

WARNING - Ignition switch

Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is moving. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

WARNING - Steering wheel

Never reach for any controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button

Whenever the front door is opened, the ENGINE START/STOP button will illuminate for your convenience. The light will go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

ENGINE START/STOP button position

OFF

To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. When you press the ENGINE START/STOP button without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the ENGINE START/STOP button will not change to the OFF position but to the ACC position.

In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the engine off and to the ACC position by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

ACC(Accessory)

Orange

ON

Blue

START/RUN

Not illuminated

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while it is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.

The electrical accessories are operational.

If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position for more than 1 hour, the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. Do not leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ON position for a long time. The battery may discharge, because the engine is not running. To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or the N (Neutral) position. For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the brake pedal, the engine will not start and the button will change as follow:

OFF → ACC → ON → OFF

If you leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ACC or ON position for a long time, the battery will discharge.

WARNING - Starting vehicle

Never press the ENGINE START/STOP button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

STARTING THE ENGINE

WARNING - Proper footwear

Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, sandals, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal.

Starting the engine with an ignition key (if equipped)

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed while turning the ignition switch to the start position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

1. Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

It should be started without depressing the accelerator.

1. Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION - Starter

Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improper use of the starter may damage it.

Starting the engine with a smart key (if equipped)

1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while depressing the brake pedal.

It should be started without depressing the accelerator.

5.Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, the engine may not start if the key is not detected by one of the antennas.
- When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the "KEY OUT" or "Indicator will blink or the warning "Key not in vehicle" will illuminate on the LCD display. And if all doors are closed, the chime will sound for 5 seconds. The indicator or warning will turn off while the vehicle is moving. Always have the smart key with you.

The engine will start, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.

WARNING - Unintended vehicle movement

Never leave the smart key in the vehicle with children or vehicle occupants who are unfamiliar with the vehicle operation. Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button while the smart key is in the vehicle may result in unintended engine activation and/or unintended vehicle movement.

• If the battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button with the smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If it is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for 10 seconds while it is in the ACC position. The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal. But for your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine.

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

The shift lever can be moved without-pressing the button.

The button (1) should be pressed when moving the shift lever into reverse.

OUB051013

Manual transaxle operation

The manual transaxle has 6 forward gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

Depress the clutch pedal down fully while shifting, then release it slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start when starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal.

The shift lever must be returned to the neutral position before shifting into R (Reverse). The button (1) located below the shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

CAUTION - Downshifting

Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may damage the engine, clutch and the transaxle.

• During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant is warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse), leave the shift lever at neutral position and release the clutch. Depress the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.

CAUTION

• To avoid premature clutch wear and damage, do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Also, do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle stopped on an uphill grade, while waiting for a traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.
  If you don't press the clutch pedal fully, the clutch may be damaged or noise may occur.

WARNING - Incline parking

Before leaving the driver's seat, always set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Then make sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st gear when the vehicle is parked on a level or uphill grade, and shifted into R (Reverse) on a downhill grade. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.

Using the clutch

The clutch should be depressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better acceleration when you need to increase your speed again. When the vehicle is traveling down steep hills, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This is extremely hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse). The transaxle can be damaged if you do not.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.
  • Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

• Never exceed posted speed limits.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning. High speed cornering and turning increases the risk of vehicle rollover due to loss of vehicle control. Rollover accidents are extremely violent and unpredictable.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.

Press the button when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

OUB051014

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.

NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM (Transaxle Control Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatic transaxle

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Do not use the P position in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the shift lever is latched in the P position and set the parking brake fully. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.

CAUTION - Transaxle

To avoid damage to your transaxle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on. The transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.

When stopped on an upgrade, do not hold the vehicle with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.

Transaxle ranges

The indicator light in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating.

Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

CAUTION - Shifting

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transaxle if you shift into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion, except when "Rocking the Vehicle" explained in this section.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator fully, at which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower gear.

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stopped or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In Sports mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to shift gears rapidly. In contrast to a manual transaxle, the Sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

- In Sports mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.

- In Sports mode, only the 6 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.

- In Sports mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.

- In Sports mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.

- When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the +(up) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st gear.

Interior view of a car dashboard with visible steering wheel and headrest (no text or symbols)

Paddle shifter (if equipped)

The paddle shifter is available when the shift lever is in the sport mode.

With the shift lever in the sports mode Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to shift up or down one gear.

\*NOTICE

If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle shifters at the same time, you can't shift the gear.

Shift lock system (if equipped)

Shift-lock override (without smart key system)

For your safety, the automatic transaxle has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transaxle out of P (Park) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering noise near the shift lever may be heard. This is a normal condition.

WARNING - Shifting from park

Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle.

Shift-lock override (with smart key system)

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into the R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:

Mechanical gear shift lever diagram showing keyway and wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Carefully remove the cap covering the shift-lock access hole (1).
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access hole and press down on the screwdriver.
   3.Move the shift lever.
3. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer immediately.

Ignition key interlock system (if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.
  • Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.

Driving up a steep grade from a standing start

To drive up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the appropriate gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the service brakes.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

CAUTION - Brake pedal

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormally high brake temperatures which can cause excessive brake lining and pad wear.

WARNING - Steep hill braking

Avoid continuous application of the brakes when descending a long or steep hill by shifting to a lower gear. Continuous brake application will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

Wet brakes may impair the vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal.

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater than normal.

WARNING - Parking brake

Avoid applying the parking brake to stop the vehicle while it is moving except in an emergency situation. Applying the parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

CAUTION - Replace brake pedal

Do not continue to drive with worn brake pads. Continuing to drive with worn brake pads can damage the braking system and result in costly brake repairs.

Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs.

WARNING - Brake wear

Do not ignore high pitched wear sounds from your brakes. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a serious accident.

Rear drum brakes (if equipped)

Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators. Therefore, have the rear brake linings inspected if you hear a rubbing noise. Also have your rear brakes inspected each time you change or rotate your tires and when you have the front brakes replaced.

Close-up of a car interior showing a handle and seat, with a yellow arrow indicating a specific component (no text or symbols visible)

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on a grade, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear for manual transaxle vehicles or in the P (Park) position for automatic transaxle vehicles.

CAUTION - Parking brake

Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with numbered parts (1 and 2), no readable text or symbols present.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly, press the release button (1) and lower the parking brake lever (2) while holding the button.

WARNING - Parking brake use

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parked to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

W-75

Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will illuminate when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, stop driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions.

The vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds in the following circumstances:

• When driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads
• When driving with tire chains installed
• When driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface heights.

Driving in these conditions increases the stopping distance for your vehicle. The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a "tik-tik" sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes.

\*NOTICE

A clicking sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the Anti-Lock Brake System is functioning properly.

• Even with the Anti-Lock Brake System, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.
  • Always slow down when cornering. The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the Anti-Lock Brake System may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS but your regular brakes will work normally. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

• When you drive on a road with poor traction, such as an icy road, and operated your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

\*NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS has malfunctioned.

• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted 'OFF' button (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Electronic stability control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability control (ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the brakes on individual wheels and intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle. No system, no matter how advanced, can compensate for all driver error and/or driving conditions. Always drive responsibly.

Electronic stability control (ESC) will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with ESC installed, always follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for the conditions.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a "tik-tik" sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turned ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately 3 seconds, then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator will illuminate). To turn the ESC on, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine, you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator light blinks.

- When the Electronic Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.

- When moving out of the mud or slippery road, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to increase.

ESC operation off ESC OFF state

• To cancel the engine management system of ESC, press the ESC OFF button for less than 3 seconds (ESC OFF indicator light illuminates). The brake control function still operates.

• To cancel the engine management and brake control function of ESC, press the ESC OFF button for more than 3 seconds (ESC OFF indicator light illuminates).

- If the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

Indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the indicator light illuminates, then goes off if ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates when ESC fails to operate.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires.

WARNING - Electronic stability control

Drive carefully even though your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control. It can only assist you in maintaining control under certain circumstances.

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• It's a good idea to keep the ESC turned on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).

If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.

WARNING - Operating ESC

Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating. If the ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may go out of control.

Hill-start assist control (HAC)

Hill start Assist Control is a comfort function. The intent is to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards from a stop, on initial take-off while on an inclined. HAC holds the braking pressure builtup by driver during stopping procedure for 2 seconds after releasing brake pedal.

During the pressure-hold period, the driver has enough time to press the accelerator pedal to drive off.

The braking pressure is reduced as soon as the system detects the driver's intention to drive off.

WARNING - Maintaining Brake Pressure on Incline HAC does not replace the need to apply brakes while stopped on an incline. While stopped, make sure you maintain brake pressure sufficient to prevent your vehicle from rolling backward and causing an accident. Don't release the brake pedal until you are ready to accelerate forward.

• The HAC does not operate when the transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the ESC is off but it does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.

Vehicle stability management (VSM)

This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a vehicle detected changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels and left wheels when braking.

VSM operation

When the VSM is in operation, ESC indicator light (Bolinks.

When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.

\*NOTICE

No system, no matter how advanced, can compensate for all driver error and/or driving conditions. Always drive responsibly.

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on bank road such as gradient or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light (OFF) remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the instrument cluster

VSM operation off

If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the ESC OFF indicator light ( )illuminates.

To turn on the VSM, press the button again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes out.

Malfunction indicator

The VSM can be deactivated even if you don't cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the Electric Power Steering system or VSM system. If the ESC indicator light (or ESC warning light remains on, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

• The VSM is designed to function above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) on curves.

• The VSM is designed to function above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) when a vehicle is braking on surfaces which have different friction forces.

• The Vehicle Stability Management system is not a substitute for safe driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always hold the steering wheel firmly while driving.

• Your vehicle is designed to activate according to the driver's intention, even with installed VSM. Always follow all the normal precautions for driving at safe speeds for the conditions – including driving inclement weather and on a slippery road.

WARNING - Tire/Wheel size

When replacing tires and wheels, make sure they are the same size as the original tires and wheels installed. Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may diminish any supplemental safety benefits of the VSM system.

Good braking practices

• Check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the vehicle is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

- Don't coast down hills with the vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because the brakes might overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

- Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

If the cruise control is left on, (CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated) the cruise control can be switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

Do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.

\*NOTICE

During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.

\*NOTICE

To activate cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the ignition switch to the ON position or starting the engine. This is to check if the brake switch which is important part to cancel cruise control is in normal condition.

WARNING - Misuse cruise control

Do not use cruise control if the traffic situation does not allow you to drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient distance to the vehicle in front.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard, with a close-up inset of the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

To set cruise control speed:

1. Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

1. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going downhill.

To increase cruise control set speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

- Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release the lever at the speed you want.

- Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated in this manner.

■ Type A

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

OUB055082K

Type B

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

OUB055083K

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

- Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the lever at the speed you want to maintain.

- Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated in this manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with the cruise control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard, with a close-up inset of the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

To cancel cruise control, do one of the following:

• Depress the brake pedal.
- Depress the clutch pedal with a manual transaxle.

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, move the lever up (to RES+). You will return to your previously preset speed.

Two views of a car steering wheel showing front and side views, labeled Type A and Type B (no text or symbols on the dashboard itself)

To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h):

If any method other than the CRUISE switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when you move the lever (1) up (to RES+).

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following:

• Press the CRUISE button (the CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions will cancel the cruise control operation. If you want to resume the cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in "To set cruise control speed" on the previous page.

ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ISG system, which reduces fuel consumption by automatically shutting down the engine, when the vehicle is at a standstill. (For example: red light, stop sign and traffic jam)

The engine starts automatically as soon as the starting conditions are met.

The ISG system is ON whenever the engine is running.

NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by the ISG system, some warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, ESC or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds.

This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean the system is malfunctioning.

Auto stop

To stop the engine in idle stop mode

Stop the vehicle completely by pressing the brake pedal.

The idle stop mode activates in case:

- The vehicle speed has exceeded 5 mph (8 km/h) at least once and the shift lever is in the D (Drive) or N (Neutral) position.

The engine will stop and the green AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will illuminate.

If your vehicle is equipped with the type B cluster, the notice will illuminate on the LCD display.

Interior view of a car showing dashboard and side panel with a highlighted 'OFF' button (no text or symbols beyond the label)

OUB051021

If you open the engine hood in auto stop mode, the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and ISG system is deactivated. If your vehicle is equipped with the type B cluster, the notice will illuminate on the LCD display.

Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine manually.

Auto start

To restart the engine from idle stop mode

The engine restarts from the idle stop mode when:

• Releasing the brake pedal
- Moving the shift lever to R (Reverse) position or sports mode with the brake pedal depressed
- Moving the shift lever to N (Neutral) position to D (Drive) position

The engine will start and the green AUTO STOP Indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will go out after blinking for 5 seconds

The engine will restart automatically without the driver's any actions if the following occurs:

• When the front defroster is on.
• The brake vaccum pressure is low.
• The battery charging status is low.

• The vehicle speed exceeds 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

• The fan speed is in the highest position when the air conditioning is on.

• Engine is turned off by Auto Stop for a long time.
• If you unfasten the seat belt or open the driver's door while depressing the brake pedal.
• When a certain amount of time has passed with the climate control system on.

The green AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will go out after blinking for 5 seconds and the notice will illuminate on the LCD display (for type B cluster).

Condition of ISG system operation

The ISG system will operate under the following condition:

• The driver's seat belt is fastened.
• The driver's door and hood are closed.
• The brake vaccum pressure is adequate.
• The battery is sufficiently charged.
• The outside temperature is more than 28.4^irc F ( -2^irc C).
• The outside temperature is under 89.6°F (32°C).
• The engine coolant temperature is not low.
• The vehicle is on a flat road surface.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted OFF button and a warning symbol (no readable text or symbols beyond the label)

• If the ISG system does not meet that operation condition, the ISG system is deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate.
• If the light comes on continuously, please check the operation condition.

ISG system deactivation

• If you want to deactivate the ISG system, press the ISG OFF button. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and the notice will illuminate on the LCD display (for type B cluster).
• If you press the ISG OFF button again, the system will be activated and the light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.

ISG system malfunction

The system may not operate when:

- The ISG related sensors or system error occurs.

The yellow AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will stay on after blinking for 5 seconds and the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate.

If your vehicle is equipped with cluster type B cluster, the notice will illuminate on the LCD display.

If the ISG OFF button light is not turned off by pressing the ISG OFF button again or if the ISG system continuously does not work correctly, please contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING - Engine Repair

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (OFF) position or remove the key from the ignition completely before performing work on the vehicle in the engine area. Failure to do so could result in serious injuries due to sudden engine reactivation.

\*NOTICE

If the AGM battery is reconnected or replaced, ISG function will not operate immediately.

If you want to use the ISG function, the battery sensor needs to be calibrated for approximately 4 hours with the ignition off and then, turn the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.

ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Active ECO operation

Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency by controlling the engine and transaxle. But fuel-efficiency can be changed by the driver's driving habits and road conditions.

- When the Active ECO button is pressed the ECO indicator (green) will illuminate to show that the Active ECO is operating.

- When the Active ECO is activated, it does not turn off even though the engine is restarted again. To turn off the system, press the active ECO button again.

- If Active ECO is turned off, it will return to the normal mode.

Limitation of Active ECO operation:

If the following conditions occur while Active ECO is operating, the system operation is limited even though there is no change in the ECO indicator.

- When the coolant temperature is low:

The system will be limited until engine performance becomes normal.

- When driving up a hill:

The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because the engine torque is restricted.

- When using Sports mode:

The system will be limited according to the shift location.

- When the accelerator pedal is deeply pressed for a few seconds:

The system will be limited, Judging that the driver wants to speed up.

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.
  • Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see section 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces fuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.

• Remember, your vehicle does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in a very high gear resulting in engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off during motion

Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function properly without the engine running. In addition, turning off the ignition while driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering. Keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped.

Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or other non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING - Downshifting

Do not downshift with an automatic transaxle while driving on slippery surfaces. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid and result in an accident.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between 1st (First) and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle.

The ESC system should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

CAUTION - Vehicle rocking

Prolonged rocking may cause engine overheating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.

CAUTION - Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 35 mph (56 km/h). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat which could result in tire damage.

WARNING - Sudden vehicle movement

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle if people or objects are nearby. The vehicle may suddenly move forward or backwards as it becomes unstuck.

Black-and-white illustration of a car driving on a mountain road with a traffic signpost nearby (no text or symbols on the car or road)

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember:

- Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

- Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights.

- Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature. Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.

- Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Black and white illustration of a sedan driving under rain with clouds, no text or symbols visible

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if you're not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tires are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road

Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving.

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure.

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.

⚠ WARNING - Under/over inflated tires

Always check the tires for proper inflation before driving. Underinflated or overinflated tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. For proper tire pressures, refer to “Tires and wheels” in section 8.

WARNING - Tire tread

Always check the tire tread before driving your vehicle. Worn-out tires can result in loss of vehicle control. Worn-out tires should be replaced as soon as possible. For further information and tread limits, refer to "Tires and wheels" in section 7.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both the engine coolant and engine oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.

WINTER DRIVING

Illustration of a woman washing a car with a hose, no text or symbols present

Severe weather conditions in the winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter driving, you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

Tire chains are not legal in all states. Check state laws before fitting tire chains.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle's handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Close-up of a car tire wrapped in mesh material, showing wheel rim and tire structure (no text or symbols)

Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains. Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; snow chains may cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than 0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle caused by improper snow chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.

Install tire chains only on the front tires.

CAUTION - Snow chains Make sure the snow chains are the correct size and type for your tires. Incorrect snow chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspension and may not be covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

The snow chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the snow chains to come loose from the tire. Make sure the snow chains are SAE class "S" certified.

Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until it stops. Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle if available.

• The use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking.

CAUTION - Snow chains

• Chains that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the chains any time you hear them hitting the vehicle.

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized Kia dealer or a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See section 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 7 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an authorized Kia dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

TRAILER TOWING

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

OUB064016N/OUB064014N/OUB064019N/OUB064017N

Tire and loading information label

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:

849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit -

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

1. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

2. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

graph TD
    A["Vehicle Capacity"] --> B["Motor Position 1"]
    A --> C["Motor Position 2"]
    A --> D["Motor Position 3"]
    B --> E["Motor Position 1"]
    B --> F["Motor Position 2"]
    C --> G["Motor Position 3"]
    D --> H["Motor Position 4"]
    style A fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style B fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style C fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style D fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style E fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style F fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style G fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style H fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff

graph TD
    A["Vehicle Capacity"] --> B["Motor 1"]
    A --> C["Motor 2"]
    A --> D["Motor 3"]
    B --> E["Car 1"]
    C --> F["Car 2"]
    D --> G["Car 3"]

Item	Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight (385 kg)	849 lbs
B W	Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2	300 lbs (136 kg)
C	Available Cargo and Luggage weight (249 kg)	549 lbs

Item	Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight (385 kg)	849 lbs
B W	Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5	750 lbs (340 kg)
C	Available Cargo and Luggage weight (45 kg)	99 lbs

Item	Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight (385 kg)	849 lbs
B Weight	Subtract Occupant 163 lbs (74 kg) × 5	815 lbs (370 kg)
C	Available Cargo and Luggage weight (	34 lbs 5 kg)

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.

OEN056020

Certification label

The certification label is located on the driver's door sill at the center pillar.

This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

WARNING - Over loading

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can affect your vehicle's handling and braking ability.

The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

WARNING - Over loading

Do not overload your vehicle. Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling--all of which may result in a crash.

WARNING - Loose cargo

Do not travel with unsecured blunt objects in the passenger compartment of your vehicle (e.g. suit cases or unsecured child seats). These items may strike occupant during a sudden stop or crash.

\*NOTICE

Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's specifications and the compliance label:

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the compliance label.

The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver's door sill.

What to do in an emergency

Road warning 6-2

• Hazard warning flasher 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . 6-3

- If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . 6-3

- If you have a flat tire while driving. 6-3

- If engine stalls while driving 6-3

If the engine does not start 6-4

- If engine dose not turn over or turns over slowly . . . 6-4

- If engine turns over normally but does not start....6-4

Emergency starting 6-5

- Jump starting....6-5

- Push-starting 6-7

If the engine overheats. 6-8

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 6-9

If you have a flat tire 6-14

• Jack and tools 6-14

- Removing and storing the spare tire 6-15

- Changing tires....6-15

If you have a flat tire (Tire Mobility Kit) ..... 6-23

• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit ..... 6-24

- Components of the Tire Mobility Kit ....6-25

• Using the Tire Mobility Kit 6-26

- Checking the tire inflation pressure ..... 6-27

• Technical data....6-28

Towing 6-29

• Towing service 6-29

- Removable towing hook 6-30

• Emergency towing. 6-31

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.
- Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a cross-road or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. When the vehicle has slowed down to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse (manual transaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided later in this section.

If engine stalls while driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly

1. If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

If engine turns over normally but does not start

1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coil and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

WARNING - Push/pull start

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to overload and create a fire hazard.

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow these jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION - 12 volt battery

Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode.

WARNING - Frozen batteries

Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low as the battery may rupture or explode.

WARNING - Battery

Keep all flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which will explode if exposed to flame or sparks.

WARNING - Sulfuric acid risk

When jump starting your vehicle be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the vehicle. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive.

Jump starting procedure

Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) batteries are maintenance-free and should only be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. For charging your AGM battery, use only fully automatic battery chargers that are specially developed for AGM batteries.

When replacing the AGM battery, use only the Kia genuine battery for the ISG system.

\*NOTICE

If the AGM battery is reconnected or replaced, ISG function will not operate immediately.

If you want to use the ISG function, the battery sensor needs to be calibrated for approximately 4 hours with the ignition off and then, turn the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.

Do not open or remove the cap on top of the battery. This may cause the leak of dangerous internal electrolytes.

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked. Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

WARNING - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.

1. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Push-starting

Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle should not be push-started because it might damage the emission control system.

Vehicles equipped with automatic transaxle cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

WARNING - Tow starting vehicle

Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you will experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).

⚠ WARNING - Under the hood

While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts.

1. If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant leaks, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

WARNING - Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

1. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.
2. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

WK-14

(1) Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Even with the Tire-Pressure Monitoring System, always check your tire pressure on a regular basis with a digital tire gauge.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

If the TPMS indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or engine is running, or If it comes on after blinking for approximately one minute, take your car to your nearest authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

Low tire pressure telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicator is illuminated, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

If the telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire.

Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale may flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving before you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle. In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

WARNING - Low pressure damage

Do not drive on low pressure tires. Significantly low tire pressure can cause the tires to overheat and fail making the vehicle unstable resulting in increased braking distances and a loss of vehicle control.

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If the system is able to correctly detect an under inflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate the TPMS malfunction indicator.

Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem.

The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables or radios transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

The TPMS malfunction indicator may illuminate if snow chains or some separately purchased devices such as notebook computers, mobile charger, remote starter, navigation etc. are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

CAUTION - Repair Agents

Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by Kia to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. The tire sealant not approved by Kia may damage the tire pressure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale will blink or remain on until the low pressure tire is repaired and placed on the vehicle.

After you replace the low pressure tire with, the TPMS spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure telltale may blink or illuminate after a few minutes because the TPMS sensor mounted on the spare wheel is not initiated.

Once the low pressure tire is reinflated to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle or the TPMS sensor mounted on the replaced spare wheel is initiated by an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire pressure telltale will extinguish within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicator is not extinguished after a few minutes of driving, please visit an authorized Kia dealer.

If original mounted tire is replaced with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor on the replaced spare wheel should be initiated and the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel should be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tire carrier still activates, the tire pressure monitoring system may not operate properly. Have the tire with TPMS serviced or replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

You may not be able to identify a low tire by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure the tire's inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.

If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

NOTICE

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Close-up of mechanical parts including a tool, bracket, and wrench (no visible text or symbols)

Jack and tools

The spare tire, jack, jack handle and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment.

Remove the luggage under tray out of the way to reach the equipment.

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from "rattling" while the vehicle is in motion, store it properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing tires

Never attempt vehicle repairs in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.

Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire. The jack should be used on firm level ground. If you cannot find a firm level place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.

Be sure to use the correct front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

WARNING - Jack

Do not place any portion of your body under a vehicle that is only supported by a jack since the vehicle can easily roll off the jack. Use vehicle support stands.

Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Make sure any children present are in a secure place away from the road and from the vehicle to be raised with the jack.

WARNING - Running vehicle on jack

Do not start or run the engine of the vehicle while the vehicle is on the jack as this may cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.

Close-up of a car wheel with a yellow directional arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Removing and storing the spare tire

Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise.

Store the tire in the reverse order of removal.

To prevent the spare tire and tools from "rattling" while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

Illustration of a person crossing a highway with a car, mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R (Reverse) for manual transaxle or P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

Illustration of a silver SUV with visible suspension and charging cable (no text or symbols)

1VQA4023 OUB061005

1. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.
2. Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the jack position.

To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.

We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

Close-up of a car wheel with numbered components and a yellow arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tire has been raised off the ground.

Illustration of a car with mechanical components, showing assembly and disassembly (no text or symbols)

1. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tire you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two tabs and a raised dot to index with the jack.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car wheel connected to a bracket and a tool, with a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

1. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 1 in (30 mm). Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.
2. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.

Wheels and wheel covers may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub.

WARNING - Installing a wheel

Make sure the wheel makes good contact with the hub when installed. If the contact of the mounting surface between the wheel and hub is not good, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle.

1. To install the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.
2. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise.

Close-up of a car wheel with numbered components and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the wheel itself)

Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle.

Go around the wheel tightening every nut following the numerical sequence shown in the image until they are tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing the wheels, have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 65\~79 lb.ft (9\~11 kg.m)

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible.

After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

CAUTION - Reusing lug nuts

Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studs

Do not drive your vehicle with damaged wheel studs. If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel. This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision.

To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to "Tires and wheels" in section 8.

Important - use of compact spare tire (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only.

You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity.

The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tire in use at the same time.

⚠ WARNING - Spare tire Do not operate your vehicle on this compact spare at speeds over 50 mph (80 km/h). The compact spare tire is for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as is possible to avoid failure of the spare.

The compact spare should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).

Check the inflation pressure after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire, observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a higher speed could damage the tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, such as a pothole or debris, could seriously damage the compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire could result in tire failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle's maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm), which could result in damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the compact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly. This could damage the vehicle and result in loss of the chain.
• The compact spare tire should not be installed on the front axle if the vehicle must be driven in snow or on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire's tread life is shorter than a regular tire. Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

• The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car components may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.

Jack label

■ Example • Type A

• Type B
  

OHYK064002
* The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with manual transmission or move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and address

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted inset showing a labeled component (no readable text or symbols)

When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.

WARNING - Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.

For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use.

(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and the tire should be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

Close-up of a car tire being installed with a pressure pump and fuel valve (no visible text or symbols)

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture.

The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tire.

After you ensured that the tire is properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 200 km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of 50 MPH (80 km/h) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement.

It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the proper use of the Tire Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the Tire Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm). Please contact the nearest Kia dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a tire is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pressure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -22°F (-30°C).

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Speed restriction label

2. Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction

3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel

4. Connectors and cable for the power outlet direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor

7. On/off switch

8. Pressure gauge for displaying the tire inflation pressure

9. Screw cap for reducing tire inflation pressure

10. Hose to connect compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

WARNING - Expired sealant

Do not use the Tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. past the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Detach the speed restriction label (0) from the sealant bottle (1), and place it in a highly visible place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.

2. Screw connection hose (9) onto the connector of the sealant bottle.

3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is closed.

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (4) of the compressor so that the bottle is upright.

Close-up of a car tire being installed with a pressure regulator, no visible text or symbols

1. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0.

2. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

3. With the engine start/stop button position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5\~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tire and stay away from the tire when filling it.

WARNING - Tire pressure

Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 29 PSI(200kpa). This could result in an accident due to sudden tire failure.

1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

WARNING - Carbon monoxide

Do not leave your vehicle running in a poorly ventilated area for extended periods of time. Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation can occur.

Distributing the sealant

1. Immediately drive approximately 4\~6 miles (7\~10 km or about 10 min) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road. If this occurs, call for roadside service or towing.

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, the tire pressure sensors and wheel may be stained by sealant. Therefore, remove the tire pressure sensors and wheel stained by sealant and have it serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

1. After driving approximately 4\~6 miles (7\~10 km or about 10 min), stop at a safe location.
2. Connect connection hose (9) of the compressor directly to the tire valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recommended tire inflation.

With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pressure : Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

\*NOTICE

The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the compressor is running. To get an accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pressure: Loosen the screw cap (8) on the compressor hose.

CAUTION - Tire pressure sensor

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit including sealant not approved by Kia, the tire pressure sensors may be damaged by sealant. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tire with a new one and inspect the tire pressure sensors in authorized dealer.

Technical Data

System voltage: DC 12 V

Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V

Amperage rating: max. 15 A

Suitable for use at temperatures: -22 \~ +158°F (-30 \~ +70°C)

Max. working pressure: 87 psi (6 bar)

Size

Compressor: 6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in. (170 x 150 x 60 mm)

Sealant bottle: 3.3 x 3.0 ∅ in. (85 x 77 ∅ mm)

Compressor weight: 1.8 lbs (0.8 kg)

Sealant volume: 12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)

TOWING

Two illustrations of a flatbed truck on a ramp, showing different scenarios (no text or symbols present)

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to "Trailer towing" in section 5.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

CAUTION - Towing

• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION - Towing gear position

Always place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) when towing your vehicle. Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.

Removable towing hook (front) (if equipped)

1. Remove the towing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the towing hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing.
  • The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.

• Attach a towing strap to the towing hook.
  • Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.
• Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily with even force.
  • To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

Top-down line drawings of three vehicles: a truck, a car, and a car connected by a cable (no text or symbols)

- Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility. - Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loosened during towing.

Emergency towing precautions

- Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the steering wheel isn't locked.

- Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral).

- Release the parking brake.

- Press the brake pedal with more force than normal since you will have reduced brake performance.

- More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.

- If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off.

If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transmission is in neutral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.

CAUTION - Automatic transaxle

- To avoid serious damage to the automatic transmission, limit the vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph) and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when towing. - Before towing, check for an automatic transmission fluid leak under your vehicle. If the automatic transmission fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used.

Maintenance

Engine compartment 7-3

Maintenance services 7-4

- Owner's responsibility....7-4

- Owner maintenance precautions 7-5

Owner maintenance....7-6

- Owner maintenance schedule....7-6

Scheduled maintenance service....7-8

• Normal maintenance schedule ..... 7-9

- Maintenance under severe usage conditions.....7-30

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-32

Engine oil. 7-35

Engine coolant 7-36

Brake/clutch fluid. 7-39

Automatic transaxle fluid 7-40

Washer fluid 7-40

Parking brake....7-41

Air cleaner....7-41

Climate control air filter 7-43

Wiper blades....7-45

Battery....7-48

Tires and wheels 7-51

• Tire care 7-51

- Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..... 7-51

- Checking tire inflation pressure....7-52

- Tire rotation....7-53

- Wheel alignment and tire balance....7-54

• Tire replacement 7-55

- Wheel replacement 7-56

• Tire traction 7-56

- Tire maintenance....7-56

• Tire sidewall labeling ..... 7-56

- Tire terminology and definitions ....7-60

- All season tires ....7-62

• Summer tires 7-62

- Snow tires....7-62

• Tire chains 7-63

• Radial-ply tires 7-63

Fuses 7-65

- Instrument panel fuse replacement. 7-66

• Engine compartment fuse replacement....7-68

- Fuse/relay panel description. 7-69

Light bulbs 7-77

- Headlight, position light, turn signal light, front fog light bulb replacement .... 7-78

- Side repeater light bulb replacement .... 7-82

- Rear combination light bulb replacement ..... 7-83

• High mounted stop light replacement....7-88

- License plate light bulb replacement. 7-89

- Interior light bulb replacement 7-90

Appearance care....7-91

• Exterior care 7-91

• Interior care. 7-96

Emission control system 7-98

California perchlorate notice 7-101

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized Kia dealer perform this work.

An authorized Kia dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine Kia parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Kia dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.

Owner's responsibility

\*NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty & Consumer Information manual.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. An authorized Kia dealer meets Kia's high service quality standards and receives technical support from Kia in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an authorized Kia dealer with special tools.

\*NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty & Consumer Information manual provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Maintenance work

Do not wear jewelry or loose clothing while working under the hood of your vehicle with the engine running. These can become entangled in moving parts. If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING - Hot coolant Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in the straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year :

• Clean the body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and checks, and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow the Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.
- Driving in dusty conditions or sandy areas.
- Extensive use of brakes.
- Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used.
- Driving on rough or muddy roads.
- Driving in mountainous areas.
- Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
- Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
- More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90°F (32°C).

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After 120 months or 150,000 miles continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
□ Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
□ Add fuel additive *A
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
^* A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

(Continued)

(Continued)

□ Add fuel additive *A
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*^ If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * ^A (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*^ If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months

☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *¹
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect fuel filter *2
□ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
□ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
☐ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
□ Replace air cleaner filter

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
*^ If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive ^** (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

¹ Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
^* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months

☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive belt *₄ (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect fuel filter *2
☐ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
☐ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
□ Inspect valve clearance *3
☐ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes

(Continued)

(Continued)

13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

□ Replace air cleaner filter

☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
³ Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
*^ If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
^* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive belt ^*4 (First 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐ Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)
☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
^* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
^** If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months

☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive belt ^*4 (First 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect fuel filter * 2
☐ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
☐ Inspect fuel tank air filter * 2
☐ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace air cleaner filter
☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
□ Add fuel additive **
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
^* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive belt *1 (First 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive *_A (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), (Every 100,000 miles (150,000 km) or 120 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.

*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

^* A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * A (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months

☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive belt *4 (First 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
□ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect fuel filter * 2
☐ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
☐ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
☐ Inspect valve clearance *3
☐ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
☐ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)

(Continued)

□ Replace air cleaner filter
☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐ Replace engine coolant ⁵ (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.

*2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.

*3 Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

*1 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

*5 When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
^* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
□ Inspect drive belt *1
(First 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
□ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.

*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

*If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 102 months

□ Inspect air cleaner filter
☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
☐ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
□ Add fuel additive **
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
^* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months

☐ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□ Inspect cooling system *1
□ Inspect drive belt
(First 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
□ Inspect drive shaft and boots
□ Inspect fuel filter *2
□ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
☐ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
□ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
□ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)

□ Replace air cleaner filter

☐ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

☐ Replace engine coolant *5 (First 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

☐ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

☐ Add fuel additive * A (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

☐ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.

*2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.

*1 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

* When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

* If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

* Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

No check, No service required

☐ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM	MAINTENANCE OPERATION	MAINTENANCE INTERVALS	DRIVING CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,750 miles OR 6 MONTHS			A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K
DISC BRAKE/ PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS	R MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/ LININGS, PARKING BRAKE	R MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT	I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS	I	EVERY 7,500 miles OR 6 MONTHS	C, D, E, F, G, H, I
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL*	R	EVERY 75,000 miles	C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID*	R	EVERY 60,000 miles	A, C, E, F, G, H, I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)	R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving shorts distances of less than 5 miles in normal temperature or less than 10 miles in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 MPH
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

Fuel filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized Kia dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized Kia dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized Kia dealer should perform the operation.

Cooling system

Check the cooling system components, such as the radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid should be changed at an authorized Kia dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.

\*NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.

This is a normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.

CAUTION - Specified fluid

The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/Clutch (if equipped) fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables.

Rear brake drums and linings (if equipped)

Check the rear brake drums and linings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant (if equipped)

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

ENGINE OIL

Close-up of a vehicle's dashboard and steering wheel assembly (no visible text or symbols)

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

1. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and reinsert it fully.

CAUTION - Replace engine oil

Do not overfill with engine oil. Engine damage may result.

Close-up of a car engine bay with a hand pouring liquid into a bucket (no visible text or symbols)

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING - California proposition 65

Engine oil contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.

Use caution when working near the blade of the cooling fan. The electric motor (cooling fan) is

controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. It may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running.

Close-up of a car's front bumper with a yellow arrow pointing to the nose area (no text or symbols visible)

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion. Bring the level to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent coolant addition is required, see an authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Ambient Temperature	Mixture Percentage (volume)
	Antifreeze	Water
5°F (-15°C)	35 65
-13°F (-25°C)	40 60
-31°F (-35°C)	50 50
-49°F (-45°C)	60 40

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a circular feature, no visible text or symbols.

CAUTION - Removing radiator cap

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage.

Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

Changing the coolant

Have the coolant changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.

Put a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the alternator.

BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch\* fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch* fluid contamination.

* if equipped

⚠️ CAUTION - Proper fluid Only use brake/clutch fluid in brake/clutch system. Small amounts of improper fluids (such as engine oil) can cause damage to the brake/clutch system.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings and/or clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake/clutch* system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch* fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

In the event the brake/clutch* system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

When changing and adding brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch* fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Brake/clutch fluid

Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.

FLUID

It is recommended that the automatic transaxle fluid should be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

In severe conditions, the fluid should be changed at an authorized Kia dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.

WASHER FLUIDAUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Close-up mechanical assembly showing internal components and a yellow arrow pointing to a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

Checking the washer fluid level

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING - Windshield fluid

Do not drink the windshield washer fluid. The windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.

WARNING - Flammable fluid

Do not allow the washer fluid to come in contact with open flames or sparks. The windshield washer fluid is flammable under certain circumstances. This can result in a fire.

PARKING BRAKE

Close-up of a car's internal mechanical component, showing handle and valve (no text or symbols visible)

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of "clicks" heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized Kia dealer.

Stroke : 6\~8 "clicks" at a force of 44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

AIR CLEANER

Close-up of a mechanical device interior showing internal components and no visible text or symbols

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be washed.

You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed air.

Close-up mechanical component with highlighted section and dotted circle highlighting a detail (no visible text or symbols)

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a hand adjusting a yellow arrow pointing to a textured surface (no visible text or symbols)

1. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
2. Replace the air cleaner filter.
3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching clips.

Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to "Maintenance under severe usage conditions" in this section.)

CAUTION - Air filter maintenance

• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of nongenuine part could damage the air flow sensor.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

Close-up of a car interior showing two yellow plastic clips on the left side, with an inset close-up highlighting a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box.

Interior view of a vehicle air vent with numbered components (no visible text or symbols)

OUB071013OUB041142

1. Remove the climate control air filter cover while pressing the lock on the right side of the cover.

2. Push the right side of the climate control air filter and pull the climate control air filter out.

Maintenance

Exterior view of a rectangular metal grate with uniform slats (no text or symbols)

OMG079027

1. Replace the climate control air filter.
2. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

When replacing the climate control air filter, install it properly. Otherwise, the system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.

WIPER BLADES

Diagram of a car's front view showing two windows with snowflakes and snowflakes, no text or symbols present.

Blade inspection

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

CAUTION - Wiper blades To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

Close-up of a bird's wing structure with visible feather patterns and a curved arrow (no text or symbols)

Front windshield wiper blade

Close-up of a hand using a tool to cut or trim a leaf, with yellow arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

CAUTION - Wiper arms

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

Close-up of a hand holding plant stems with attached clips, no visible text or symbols

1. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward.
2. Lift it off the arm.
3. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

Close-up of a car wheel handle being adjusted, with a magnified inset showing the handle (no text or symbols visible)

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the wiper blade assembly.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and an inset showing a yellow arrow pointing to a detail (no text or symbols visible)

1. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the center part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
2. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized Kia dealer replace the wiper blade.

BATTERY

Close-up of a car engine battery panel with warning labels and a yellow arrow pointing to the battery (no readable text or symbols)

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel pain or burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

The battery contains lead. Do not dispose of it after use. Please return the battery to an authorized Kia dealer to be recycled.

WARNING - Recharging battery

Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.

When you don't use the vehicle for a long time in the low temperature area, separate the battery and keep it indoors.

WARNING - California proposition 65

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.

WARNING - Risk of elec- trocution

Never touch the electrical ignition system while the vehicle is running. This system works with high voltage which can "zap" you.

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at no more than 20-30A for two hours.

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.
• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 120^ircF (49^ircC) .
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.
• The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.
• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 120^ircF (49^ircC) .
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

• Auto down window (See section 4)
- Sunroof (See section 4)
- Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system (See section 4)
- Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. "Cold Tires" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear. For recommended inflation pressure refer to "Tire and wheels" in section 8.

Close-up of a car interior showing the door and seat, with a highlighted section indicating a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the driver's side center pillar.

WARNING - Tire under-inflation

Inflate your tires consistent with the instructions provided in this manual. Severe underinflation (10 psi (70 kPa) or more) can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

• Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
- Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.
- Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than one mile (1.6 km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire guage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire guage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

• Inspect your tires frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire. Kia recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to "Tire and wheels" in section 8.

Without a spare tire

graph TD
    A[" "] --> B[" "]
    C[" "] --> D[" "]
    E[" "] --> F[" "]
    G[" "] --> H[" "]
    I[" "] --> J[" "]
    K[" "] --> L[" "]
    M[" "] --> N[" "]
    O[" "] --> P[" "]
    Q[" "] --> R[" "]
    S[" "] --> T[" "]
    U[" "] --> V[" "]
    W[" "] --> X[" "]
    Y[" "] --> Z[" "]

S2BLA790A

Directional tires (if equipped)

graph TD
    A[" "] <--> B[" "]
    C[" "] <--> D[" "]

CBGQ0707A

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left. Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation.

WARNING - Mixing tire types

Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics.

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

CAUTION - Wheel weight

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. Tire size can affect wheel speed. When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESC (Electronic Stability Control) (if equipped) to work irregularly.

\*NOTICE

We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects driving performance.

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire. The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height.

CAUTION - Wheel

Wheels that do not meet Kia's specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. Slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road, to reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire's sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

P205/55R16 89H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires marked with the prefix "P" are intended for use on passenger vehicles or light trucks; however, not all tires have this marking).

205 - Tire width in millimeters.

55 - Aspect ratio. The tire's section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

89 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.0JX16

6.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger vehicles. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed Rating Symbol	Maximum Speed
S	112 mph (180 km/h)
T	118 mph (190 km/h)
H	130 mph (210 km/h)
V	149 mph (240 km/h)
Z	Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2015.

WARNING - Tire age

Replace tires within the recommended time frame. Failure to replace tires as recommended can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 440

TRACTION A

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after approximately six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process.

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicles may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Load ratings: The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords. Pneumatic tire: A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.

Production options weight: The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars," that show across the tread of a tire when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.

All season tires

Kia specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

Kia specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.

Tire chains

Tire chains, if necessary, should be installed on the front wheels.

Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

To minimize tire and chain wear, do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed.

• When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE "S" class or wire chains.
• If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to avoid contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving 0.3\~0.6 miles (0.5\~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels. In unavoidable circumstance, use a wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59 inches (15 mm) to prevent damage to the chain's connection.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires should always be used as a set of four.

Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this section to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low aspect ratio tire is shorter than the normal, the wheel and tire of the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below.

• When driving on a rough road or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not damaged.
• If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized Kia dealer.

• To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 3,000km.

• It is not easy to recognize the tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even though you cannot see the tire damage with your own eyes, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.

FUSES

OTA070039

A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle's lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will melt.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel.

Before replacing a blown fuse, move to safe place, turn off the engine and all electric devices, and then disconnect the negative battery cable.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING - Fuse replacement

• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.
  • A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on electric wiring of the vehicle.

CAUTION - Fuse replacement

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

\*NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ depending on equipment/options.

CAUTION - Fuse Replacement

Do not input any other objects except fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.

WARNING - Electrical Fire

• When replacing a blown fuse or relay with a new one, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause the vehicle wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible fire. If fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts are blown, we recommend that you consult with an authorized Kia dealer.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a yellow directional arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Instrument panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
   If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's rear vent and internal battery pack (no text or symbols visible)

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with the memory fuse to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated for prolonged periods. Use the following procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver's side panel cover and pull up the memory fuse.

If the memory fuse is pulled up from the fuse panel, the warning chime, audio, clock and interior lamps, etc., will not operate. Some items must be reset after replacement. Refer to "Battery" in this section.

Even though the memory fuse is pulled up, the battery can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or other electrical devices.

Interior view of a car showing a battery pack with visible components and wiring (no text or symbols)

Engine compartment panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the tap and pulling up the cover.

When the blade type fuse is disconnected, remove it by using the clip designed for changing fuses located in the engine room fuse box. Upon removal, securely insert reserve fuse of equal quantity.

1. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
2. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Fuse panel covers

After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover to prevent electrical failures which may occur from water leaking in.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with visible gears and wiring (no text or symbols)

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

\*NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a digital display case showing internal text (no readable signage or symbols)

Instrument panel fuse panel

\*NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ depending on equipment/options.

OUB075064N

Interior view of a vehicle electronic control panel with an inset showing a microchip (no visible text or symbols)

Engine compartment fuse panel

\*NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ depending on equipment/options.

OUB075114N

Instrument panel fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
POWER OUTLET 15A Power Outlet
C/LIGHTER 20A Cigarette Lighter
ACC 10A		Front Map Lamp, Power Outside Mirror Switch, BCM,Low DC-DC Converter, Smart Key Control Module, Audio,A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Digital Clock
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument	Cluster
A/BAG 10A		SBR PAB Indicator, SRS Control ModulePassenger Weight Classification Sensor
MODULE 2 10A BCM
MDPS 10A EPS Control Module
WIPER RR 15A Multifunction Switch, Rear		Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor
HTD STRG 15A Steering Wheel Heater
FOG LAMP RR 10A -
FOG LAMP FRT 15A Front	Fog Lamp Relay
MODULE 1 10A ATM Shift	Lever Switch, Door Warning Switch
STOP LAMP	15A	Data Link Connector, Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp SwitchStop Lamp Relay, PCB Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay)
CLUSTER	10A	Audio, BCM, ATM Shift Lever ILL., Crash Pad SwitchInstrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module
IG1 1	10A	Multipurpose Check Connector, Driver CCS Seat Warmer ModulePassenger Seat Warmer ModuleWith ISG : Crash Pad Switch, Low DC-DC Converter
ABS	10A	Crash Pad Switch, ESC ModulePCB Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay)
B/UP LAMP 10A Back-Up Lamp Switch
IG1 2 10A		Vehicle Speed Sensor, Stop Lamp Switch, InverterA/C Control Module
HAZARD 15A Hazard Switch, BCM
PDM 1 25A Smart Key Control Module
SUNROOF 15A Sunroof Motor
PDM 2 10A		Immobilizer Module, Start/Stop Button Switch,Smart Key Control Module
ECU 15A		Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module,ECM/PCM, Transaxle Range Switch
IG2 10A		BCM, Smart Key Control Module, Driver CCS Seat Warmer ModuleCluster Ionizer, Rain Sensor, A/C Control Module, Sunroof MotorPCB Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay, Head Lamp (HI) Relay,Fuel Pump #1 Relay)
WIPER FRT 25A		Multifunction Switch, Front Wiper MotorPCB Fuse & Relay Box (Rain Sensor Relay, Front Wiper Relay)
DOOR LOCK 20A		Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Unlock Relay,Two Turn Unlock Relay
SAFETY POWER WINDOW	25A Driver	Safety Power Window Module
S/HEATER	15A	Seat Warmer Switch, Driver CCS Seat Warmer Module,Passenger Seat Warmer Module
FOLD'G MIRR	10A Power	Outside Mirror Switch
ROOM LAMP	10A	BCM, Door Warning Switch, Tire Pressure Monitoring ModuleInstrument Cluster, Digital Clock, A/C Control ModuleLuggage Lamp
AUDIO 20A		With ISG : Low DC-DC ConvertorW/O ISG : Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
TAIL LAMP LH 10A		Head Lamp LH, License LampRear Combination Lamp (IN/OUT) LH
TAIL LAMP RH 10A		Head Lamp RH, License Lamp, ILL. (+),Rear Combination Lamp (IN/OUT) RH
START 10A		With Burglar Alarm : Burglar Alarm RelayW/O Burglar Alarm : Transaxle Range Switch (A/T),Smart Key Control Module (M/T), Ignition Lock Switch (M/T),ECM (M/T), PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay) (M/T)
P/WDW LH 25A		Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LHDriver Safety Power Window Module
P/WDW RH 25A		Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RHPassenger Power Window Switch
HTD MIRR 10A		ECM/PCM, A/C Control ModuleDriver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
A/CON 10A A/C Control Module

Engine compartment fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MULTI FUSE	MDPS 80A EPS Control Module
	ALT 125A Alternator
FUSE	B+1 50A		I/P Junction Box (Power Connector Fuse : ROOM LP 10A / AUDIO 20A, Fuse : FOG LP FRT 15A / MODULE 1 10A / STOP LP 15A, Tail Lamp Relay)
	INVERTER 40A Inverter
	B+2 50A		I/P Junction Box (Fuse : HAZARD 15A / PDM 1 25A / PDM 2 10A / SUNROOF 15A / DR LOCK 20A / SAFETY POWER WINDOW 25A / S/HEATER 2 15A, FOLD'G MIRR 10A / Power Window Relay)
	IG1 40A		With Smart Key - PDM Relay Box (ESCL (ACC) Relay, ESCL (IG1) Relay) W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch
	ABS1	40A ESC	Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
	ABS2	40A ESC	Module
	RR HTD	40A I/P Junction Box (Rear Defogger Relay)
	ECU 5	10A PCM
	H/LP HI IND	10A Instrument Cluster

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
IG2 40A		PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay), W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - PDM Relay Box (ESCL (IG2) Relay)
ECU1 30A PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Engine Control Relay, ECU2 10A)
ECU3 10A Not Used
BLOWER 40A PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay)
C/FAN 40A PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Cooling Fan (Low) Relay, Cooling Fan (Hi) Relay)
F/PUMP 20A PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Fuel Pump #1 Relay)
H/LAMP HI 20A PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Head Lamp (HI) Relay)
H/LAMP 20A PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Head Lamp (LO) Relay)
HORN 10A PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Horn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
ECU2 10A M/T - ECM, A/T - E/R Junction Box (ECU_VM 10A)
B/UP LAMP 10A A/T - PCM, Transaxle Range Switch
WIPER	10A ECM/PCM, Rain Sensor
ECU4 20A ECM/PCM
INJECTOR	15A ECM/PCM, PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Fuel Pump #1 Relay)
H/LAMP LH	10A Head	Lamp LH
SENSOR	10A	Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Oxygen Sensor(Up/Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve
IGN COIL	20A CONDENSOR, IGNITION COIL #1/#2/#3/#4
H/LAMP RH	10A Head	Lamp RH

LIGHT BULBS

WARNING - Lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” position and turn off the lights to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

Use only the bulbs of the specified wattage.

CAUTION - Light replacement

Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.

If you don't have necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized Kia dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlight assembly to get to the bulb(s). Removing/installing the headlight assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

Headlight, position light, turn signal light, side marker light and front fog light bulb replacement

• 4 door

(1) Headlight (High/Low)
(2) Position light
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Front fog light*

- 5 door

(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Position light
(5) Front side marker
(6) Front fog light*

*: if equipped

Hand holding a mechanical component with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or labels on the diagram itself)

Headlight bulb

WARNING - Halogen bulbs

Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if broken.

Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlight.

If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

1. Turn off the engine and open the hood. If you can reach the bulb without removing the headlight assembly, continue to step 4.

2. Remove the front bumper upper cover.

3. Remove the headlight assembly from the body of the vehicle.

4. Disconnect the power connector(s) from the back of the headlight assembly.

Close-up of mechanical components with arrows indicating parts of a device (no visible text or symbols)

Headlight(High/Low)

• 4 door

1. Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

2. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining wire by depressing the end and pushing it right ward.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Insert a new bulb into the socket.

5. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the shape on the bulb housing in the assembly. Pushing the spring holder in to the slot.

6. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with highlighted parts and a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

Headlight (High)

- 5 door

1. Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

2. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining wire by depressing the end and pushing it down ward.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Insert a new bulb into the socket.

5. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the shape on the bulb housing in the assembly. Pushing the spring holder in to the slot.

6. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

Headlight (Low)

- 5 door

Follow the steps 1 to 4 from the previous section.

1. Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

2. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Insert a new bulb into the socket.

5. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

6. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

If the headlight aiming adjustment is necessary after the headlight assembly is reinstalled, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Close-up of a car headlight component with no visible text or symbols

Turn signal light/Position light or Side marker

Follow the steps 1 to 4 from the previous page.

1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

2. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket

3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

4. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Position light (if equipped)

If the light bulb does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow tag and mounting holes (no visible text or symbols)

3D mechanical component with a yellow arrow indicating a specific part, labeled '4 door' and 'OUB071077' (no readable text or symbols beyond labels)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow indicating a specific part, labeled '5 door' and 'OUB071056' (no readable text or symbols beyond labels)

Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)

1. Remove the under cover by rotating the screws.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.
   6 Connect the power connector to the socket.

Close-up of a car's side mirror and wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Side repeater light bulb replacement (if equipped)

Type A

If the light bulb does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. A skilled technician should check or repair the side repeater lamp, for it may damage related out side mirror parts of the vehicle.

Type B

1. Remove the light assembly from the vehicle by prying the lens and pulling the assembly out.
2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.
3. Separate the socket and the lens parts by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the lens part.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the lens part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

Rear combination light bulb replacement

(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light

Stop and tail light (LED type, if equipped)

If the light (LED) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with two yellow-green clips attached (no text or symbols visible)

Outside light

Rear turn signal light and tail/stop light

• 4 door

1. Turn off the engine.

2.Open the trunk lid.

1. Remove the service cover by pulling out the service cover.

Close-up of a mechanical component with multiple connectors and fittings (no visible text or symbols)

1. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

2. Install the service cover by putting it into the service hole.

3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

Close-up of mechanical components with no visible text or symbols

• 5 door

1. Turn off the engine.
   2.Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screw-driver.
3. Remove the rear combination light assembly from the body of the vehicle.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
2. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

OUB071038OUB071037

1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

Technical illustration of a car trunk with highlighted structural components (no text or symbols)

Inside light

Back-up light/tail light

• 4 door

1. Turn off the engine.
   2.Open the trunk.
2. Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk lid cover and then remove the cover.

3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

Close-up of mechanical components with wiring and connectors, no visible text or symbols

1. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

2. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

3. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by pushing in the screw.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow warning label and screw base (no readable text or symbols)

- 5 door

1. Turn off the engine.
   2.Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover.

Close-up of electrical wiring and components inside a device (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

4. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

5. Install the service cover by putting it into the service hole.

Maintenance

High mounted stop light replacement

• 4 door
1. Turn off the engine
2.Open the trunk

1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
4. Reinstall the socket in the assembly in the reverse order of removal.

- 5 door

1. Turn off the engine
   2.Open the tailgate.
2. Gently remove the rubber cover (1).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

Close-up of a car hood with yellow directional arrows indicating movement or change, no visible text or symbols

1. Loosen the retaining nuts.

2. Remove the washer hose socket from the lamp assembly by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

3. Reinstall a new light assembly in the reverse order of removal.

Close-up of a car interior panel with directional arrows and a highlighted connector detail (no text or symbols)

OUB071043OUB071061N

License plate light bulb replacement

1. Remove the lens by pressing the tabs.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket and install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.

Maintenance

OUB071044/OAM079038
■ Glove box lamp

Close-up of a car interior showing a plastic bag being inserted into a container, with two hand gestures indicating the process (no text or symbols visible)

■ Luggage room lamp (5 door)

Close-up of a car's front window showing a plastic clip and a close-up of its internal components (no text or symbols visible)

OUB071047/OUB071046

Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

WARNING - Interior lights

Prior to working on the Interior Lights, ensure that the "OFF" button is pressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

1. Install a new bulb in the socket.
2. Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle's finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle's finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

High-pressure washing

- When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.

- Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

- Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water.

CAUTION - Wetting engine

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.
- Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer's instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

CAUTION - Drying vehicle

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels. They may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergents. It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produce vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

- If you live in a high-corrosion area — where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

- When cleaning underneath the vehicle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

- When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

CAUTION - Electrical components

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTION - Leather

When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION - Rear windows

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Warranty & Maintenance booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from mis-firing during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.
  • After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

• Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.

1. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control sole-noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

- If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide)

- Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

WARNING - Catalytic converter

Keep away from the catalytic converter and exhaust system while the vehicle is running or immediately thereafter. The exhaust and catalytic systems are very hot and may burn you.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING - Fire

• Do not park, idle or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
  Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Engine 8-2

Dimensions 8-2

Bulb wattage....8-3

Tires and wheels....8-5

Weight and volume 8-6

Air conditioning system....8-6

Recommended lubricants and capacities ..... 8-7

• Recommended SAE viscosity number ..... 8-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) 8-9

Vehicle certification label 8-9

Tire specification and pressure label....8-10

Engine number....8-10

Refrigerant label 8-10

Consumer assistance 8-11

Electrical equipment 8-13

Reporting safety defects 8-14

Online factory authorized manuals....8-15

ENGINE

Item Gasoline	1.6
Displacement [cu.in(cc)]	97.09(1,591)
Bore x Stroke [in(mm)]	3.03 x 3.36(77 x 85.44)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line

DIMENSIONS

Item in (mm)
Overall length		4 door 1	72 (4370)
		5 door 1	59.4 (4050)
Overall width 67.7 (1720)
Overall height 57.2 (1455)
Front tread	185/65R15 59.8 (1520)
	205/45R17 59.3 (1507)
Rear tread	185/65R15 60 (1525)
	205/45R17 59.4 (1511)
Wheelbase 101.1 (2570)

BULB WATTAGE

■ 5 door

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front	Head lamp	Low 55W H11B
		High 55W H1
	Position lamp 5W or LED P21/5W or LED
	Turn signal lamp 21W PY21W
	Front fog lamp* 55W 9006
	Side marker light		5W	W5W
Rear	Tail lamp	Inside	5W or LED	W5W or LED
		Outside	8W or LED P28/8W or LED
	Stop lamp	Inside	LED	LED
		Outside	28W or LED	P28/8W or LED
	Turn signal lamp 21W PY21W
	Back up lamp		16W	W16W
	High mounted stop lamp		LED	LED
	License plate lamp		5W X 2EA	W5W
	Side marker light*			as tail bulb
			LED LED*
Interior	Map lamps*		10W X 2EA	W10W
	Room lamps		10W	FESTON
	Luggage lamp		5W	FESTON
	Glove box lamp		5W	FESTON
	Vanity mirror lamps*		5W	FESTON

* : if equipped

4 door

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front	Head lamp	Low 55W HB2
		High 60W HB2
	Position lamp 5W or LED W5W or LED
	Turn signal lamp 28W PY28/8W
	Front fog lamp* 55W 9006
	Side marker light 5W W5W
Rear	Tail lamp	Inside 8W or LED P27/8W or LED
		Outside	8W or LED	P27/8W or LED
	Stop lamp	Inside	LED	LED
		Outside	27W or LED	P27/8W or LED
	Turn signal lamp 21W		PY21W
	Back up lamp		16W	W16W
	High mounted stop lamp		16W	W16W
	License plate lamp		5W X 2EA	W5W
	Side marker light*			as tail bulb
			LED LED*
Interior	Map lamps*		10W X 2EA	W10W
	Room lamps		10W	FESTON
	Luggage lamp		5W	FESTON
	Glove box lamp		5W	FESTON
	Vanity mirror lamps*		5W	FESTON

* : if equipped

TIRES AND WHEELS

Item Tire	size Wheel size		Cold tire inflation pressure / psi (kPa)				Wheel lug nut torque / lb.ft(kg.m, N.m)
			Normal load Maximum load
			Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire	P185/65R15* 5.5J X 15		33(230)	33(230)	33(230)	33(230)	65~79(9~11, 88~107)
	P205/45R17* 6.5J X 17
Compact* spare tire	T125/80D15 3.5J X 15		60(420)	60(420)	60(420)	60(420)

* : if equipped

\*NOTICE

We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects driving performance.

WEIGHT/VOLUME

Item			Gasoline 1.6
			4 Door 5 Door
			M/T A/T	M/T A/T
Gross vehicle weight lbs. (kg)			3593(1630)	3660(1660)	3527(1600)	3593(1630)
Luggage volume cu ft (l)	4 Door (SAE)	Min. 1	3.7 (389)
		Max. -
	5 Door (VDA)	Min. 1	0 (288)
		Max. 3	2 (923)

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Item Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant	0.98 ~ 1.09 lbs(445 ~ 495g)	R-134a
Compressor lubricant	110 ~ 130 cc PAG (FD46XG)

We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant		Volume	Classification
Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill) recommended (or equivalent)TOTAL		3.8 US qt. (3.6 l)	API Service SM*3, ILSAC GF4 or above, ACEA A5 or above
Manual transaxle fluid		1.7 ~ 1.8 US qt.(1.6 ~ 1.7 l)	API GL-4, SAE 70W approved by Kia Motors Corp.
Automatic transaxle 1.6	Engine	7.71 US qt. (7.3 l)	MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV NOCA ATF SP-IV, Kia genuine ATF SP-IV or other brands meeting the above specification approved by Kia Motor Co.,
Coolant	Automatic transaxle	5.6 US qt. (5.5 l)	Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
	Manual transaxle	5.8 US qt. (5.3 l)
Brake/Clutch fluid		0.7 ~ 0.8 US qt.(0.7 ~ 0.8 l)	FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel		11.4 US gal. (43 l)	Refer to "Fuel requirements" in section 1

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Recommended SAE viscosity number

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operation (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature °C(°F)	-30	-20	-10	0	10	20	30	40	50
	-10		0	20	40	60	80	100	120
GasolineEngine Oil *1			10W-30
			5W-20, 5W-30

*1 For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

Close-up of a car's side panel with a yellow arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

VIN label

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

Close-up of a car's side panel showing airflow and structural details (no text or symbols visible)

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver's side center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).

PRESSURE LABEL

Close-up of a car interior showing airflow patterns and structural details (no text or symbols visible)

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABELTIRE SPECIFICATION AI

Close-up of a car engine bay with a yellow arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

Close-up of a car's front bumper with a yellow arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols

The refrigerant label is located on the underside of the hood.

The label contains the following information:

• Type of refrigerant / oil

• Amount of refrigerant / oil

CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)

Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is delivered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable to your model year vehicle.

KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment, the claims and/or service requests are excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

Toll free consumer assistance

Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).

For more information regarding assistance available, please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer Information Manual.

Emergency roadside assistance

Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24 hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).

Please note that you must provide your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your vehicle on the driver's side, on the door jamb of the driver's door, your vehicle's registration or proof of insurance card.

Kia utilizes a network of over 30,000 roadside assistance providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch someone to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tire with your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to allow you to proceed to your destination. We have access to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you should you become locked out of your Kia.

In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehicle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia's Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an alternative service location.

Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this service. add:

Roadside Assistance is subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable to your model year vehicle.

NOTICE

Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “salvage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’s law or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by a financial institution or insurance company.

Trip interruption

Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimbursement is included for meals, lodging, or rental car expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to \$100 per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident. You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles, expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.

Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under Kia's Trip Interruption Policy.

Registering your vehicle in a foreign country

If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country, you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in that country.

Even if you successfully register the vehicle in a foreign country, you may experience the following problems and should therefore consider the possibility of having to deal with them:

1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable. If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and other fuel-related parts which may not be covered under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.
2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave the country in which you purchased your Kia new and register it in another country, problems arising from the use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject to manufacturer's warranty. Because vehicles like yours may not be marketed in the new country of registration, parts, servicing techniques and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable.

Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical specifications required by the government may vary enough from the country of purchase to cause additional problems.

1. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services in a foreign country for any number of reasons.

Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for problems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack of service outside of the United States.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)

The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to perform under all reasonably expected operating conditions. However, before any additional electrical equipment is installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your warranty.

Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehicle, including such systems as the engine control system, the audio system and the electrical charging system and thus potentially void all or part of your warranty.

We assume no responsibility for any expense you may incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its components or systems that may result from the installation of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied, or recommended for installation by, Kia.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly, or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer concerning the proper equipment and installation.

Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and defects please contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line as below:

National Consumer Affairs Manager

Kia Motors America, Inc.

P.O. Box 52410

Irvine, CA 92619-2410

1-800-333-4Kia (4542)

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia Motors America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, SE., West Building Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS (U.S. ONLY)

The following publications are available on www.KiaTechinfo.com.

Service manual:

This manual covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Electrical troubleshooting manual:

This manual complements the Service Manual by providing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.

Owner's manual:

This manual describes the overall features and operating procedures for the vehicle.

Index

Index

A

Active Eco System 5-45

Air bag warning label 3-54

Air bag warning light 3-34

Air bag 3-31

Air bag warning label 3-54

Air bag warning light 3-34

Curtain air bag....3-46

Driver's and passenger's front air bag....3-42

Occupant detection system 3-37

Side impact air bag....3-45

SRS components and functions....3-34

Air cleaner 7-41

Air conditioning system 8-6

Antenna (Roof) 4-125

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 5-26

Appearance care....7-91

Exterior care 7-91

Interior care 7-96

Ashtray 4-118

Audio system 4-125

Antenna 4-125

Steering wheel audio control 4-126

Automatic climate control system 4-98

Air conditioning 4-105

Climate control air filter 4-107

Automatic transaxle 5-16

Shift lock 5-20

Sports mode....5-18

Automatic transaxle fluid 7-40

Aux, USB and iPod 4-127

B

Base curb weight 5-61

Battery....7-48

Battery saver function....4-77

Before driving....5-3

Bottle holders, see cup holders 4-119

Brake system 5-22

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-26

Electronic stability program (ESC)....5-27

Hill-start assist control (HAC) 5-31

Parking brake 5-24

Power brakes 5-22

Vehicle stability management (VSM) 5-31

Brakes/clutch fluid 7-39

Bulb replacement....7-78

Bulb wattage....8-3

C

Calendar 4-122

Capacities (Lubricants) 8-6

Care

Exterior care 7-91

Interior care 7-96

Tire care....7-51

Cargo capacity 5-57

Cargo weight....5-61

Center console storage....4-114

Central door lock switch....4-19

Certification label 5-59, 8-9

Chains

Tire chains 5-53

Changing tires....6-15

Checking tire inflation pressure....7-52

Child restraint system....3-23

Automatic locking mode 3-25

Lower anchor....3-29

Tether anchor system....3-28

Child-protector rear door lock 4-20

Cigarette lighter 4-118

Climate control air filter....4-96/107, 7-43

Clock (Digital) 4-122

Clothes hanger 4-123

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster 4-46

Compact spare tire....6-20

Compact spare tire replacement 7-55

Coolant 7-36

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant....7-36

Crankcase emission control system....7-98

Cruise control system 5-35

Cup holder 4-119

Curtain air bag 3-46

D

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination....4-47

Dashboard, see instrument cluster 4-46

Defogging (Windshield) 4-109

Defogging logic (Windshield)....4-111

Defroster (Rear window) 4-87

Defrosting (Windshield) 4-109

Digital clock 4-122

Dimensions 8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination....4-47

Displays, see instrument cluster 4-46

Door locks....4-17

Central door lock switch 4-19

Child-protector rear door lock 4-20

Index

Drinks holders, see cup holders....4-119
Driver's 3-point seat belt....3-15
Driver's and passenger's front air bag....3-42
Driving at night....5-49
Driving in flooded areas 5-50
Driving in the rain....5-50

E

Economical operation....5-46
Electric power steering....4-40
Electronic stability program (ESC) 5-27
Emergency starting 6-5
Jump starting 6-5
Push starting 6-7
Emergency while driving....6-3
Emission control system....7-98
Crankcase emission control system....7-98
Evaporative emission control System 7-98
Exhaust emission control system 7-99
Engine 8-2
Engine compartment....2-6
Engine compartment panel fuse 7-68
Engine coolant 7-36
Engine coolcant temperature gauge....4-47
Engine number....8-10
Engine oil....7-35

Engine overheats....6-8
Engine START/STOP button 5-7
Engine will not start....6-4
Evaporative emission control System....7-98
Exhaust emission control system....7-99
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7-32
Exterior care....7-91
Exterior overview 1....2-2
Exterior overview II 2-3

F

Flat tire (with spare tire)....6-14

Jack and tools 6-14
Changing tires....6-15
Compact spare tire....6-20
Removing and storing the spare tire....6-15

Flat tire....6-23

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-123

Fluid

Automatic transaxle fluid....7-40
Brakes/clutch fluid 7-39
Washer fluid....7-40

Folding the outside rearviwe mirror....4-45
Folding the rear seat 3-10
Front passenger and rear seat belt 3-17
Front seat adjustment....3-4

Index

Fuel filler lid 4-33
Fuel gauge....4-48
Fuel requirements 1-3
Fuses 7-65
Engine compartment panel fuse....7-68
Fuse/relay panel description....7-69
Instrument panel fuse 7-66
Memory fuse....7-67
Multi fuse 7-68

G

Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge....4-48
Fuel gauge 4-48
GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-61
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) 5-61
Glove box 4-114
GVW (Gross vehicle weight) 5-61
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)....5-61

H

Hazard warning flasher 4-77
Hazardous driving conditions....5-48
Headrest(front)....3-5
Headrest(rear) 3-9
Hight adjustment....3-16

Highway driving 5-51
Hill-start assist control (HAC) 5-31
Hood 4-31
Horn 4-42
How to use this manual 1-2

|

Idle stop and go system (ISG)....5-40
Immobilizer system 4-12
Indicators and warnings 4-59
Inside rearview mirror 4-43
Instrument cluster 4-46

Engine coolant temperature gauge....4-48
Fuel gauge 4-48
Instrument panel illumination 4-47
LCD display warning 4-70
Maintenance 4-57
Odometer 4-49
Speedometer 4-47
Tachometer 4-47
Trip computer 4-50
User settings 4-55
Warning and indicators....4-59

Instrument panel fuse....7-66
Instrument panel illumination....4-47
Instrument panel overview 2-5

Index

Interior care....7-96

Interior features....4-118

Ashtray 4-118

Aux, USB and iPod....4-127

Cigarette lighter 4-118

Clothes hanger 4-123

Cup holder....4-118

Digital clock and calendar....4-122

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-123

Power outlet 4-121

Shopping bag holder....4121

Sliding armrest 4-120

Sunvisor 4-120

Interior light 4-85

Interior overview....2-4

ISG system....5-40

J

Jack and tools....6-14

Jump starting....6-5

K

Key positions 5-5

Keys 4-3

Immobilizer key 4-11

Remote(or Smart) key battery replacement 4-10

L

Label

Air bag warning label....3-54

Refrigerant label 8-10

Tire sidewall labeling 7-56

Tire specification and pressure label....8-10

Vehicle certification label 8-9

LCD display warning 4-70

Light bulbs....7-77

Lighting....4-77

Battery saver function....4-77

Lower anchor....3-29

Lubricants and capacities....8-7

Luggage net 4-115

Luggage tray 4-116

M

Maintenance 4-57

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7-32

Maintenance services....7-4

Maintenance under severe usage conditions....7-30

Normal maintenance schedule....7-9

Owner maintenance....7-6

Scheduled maintenance service....7-8

Tire maintenance 7-56

Maintenance schedule....7-8

Maintenance under severe usage conditions 7-30

Normal maintenance schedule....7-9

Maintenance services....7-4

Manual climate control system 4-88

Air conditioning 4-94

Climate control air filter....4-96

Heating and air conditioning....4-89

Manual transaxle 5-13

Memory fuse....7-67

Mirrors 4-43

Day/night rearview mirror 4-43

Folding the outside rearviwe mirror 4-45

Inside rearview mirror 4-43

Outside rearview mirror 4-43

Remote control 4-44

Multi fuse....7-68

0

Occupant detection system 3-37

Odometer 4-49

Oil (Engine) 7-35

Outside rearview mirror 4-43

Outside rearview mirror remote control....4-44

Overheats 6-8

Owner maintenance 7-6

P

Parking brake....5-24, 7-41

Power brakes....5-22

Power outlet 4-121

Power window lock button 4-29

Pre-tensioner seat belt....3-18

Push starting 6-7

R

Rear seat....3-9

Rear-Camera Display 4-76

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures 7-51

Recommended lubricants and capacities....8-7

Recommended SAE viscosity number 8-8

Refrigerant label 8-10

Remote control (Mirror) 4-44

Remote keyless entry 4-9

Remote(or Smart) key battery replacement....4-11

Replacement light bulb 7-78

Road warning....6-2

Rocking the vehicle 5-48

Roof antenna 4-125

Index

S

Scheduled maintenance service....7-8

Maintenance under severe usage conditions....7-30

Normal maintenance schedule....7-9

Seat belt warning 3-14

Seat belts....3-13

3 Point rear center belt 3-15

Hight adjustment 3-16

Pre-tensioner seat belt 3-18

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system 3-15

Seat belt warning....3-14

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat....3-17

Seat Warmer 3-8

Seatback pocket 3-9

Seating capacity....5-57

Seats 3-2

Folding the rear seat....3-10

Front seat adjustment....3-4

Headrest(front) 3-5

Headrest(rear)....3-9

Rear seat 3-9

Seatback pocket 3-9

Warmer 3-8

Shift Lock 5-20

Shopping bag holder 4-121

Side impact air bag....3-45

Smart key 4-6

Smooth cornering 5-49

Snow tires 5-52

Spare tire

Compact spare tire 6-20

Compact spare tire replacement....7-55

Removing and storing the spare tire....6-15

Special driving conditions 5-48

Driving at night 5-49

Driving in flooded areas 5-50

Driving in the rain 5-50

Hazardous driving conditions....5-48

Highway driving....5-51

Rocking the vehicle....5-48

Smooth cornering 5-49

Speedometer 4-47

Sports mode 5-18

SRS components and functions....3-34

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start....6-4

Steering wheel 4-40

Electric power steering....4-40

Horn 4-42

Tilt & Telescoping steering 4-41

Steering wheel audio control....4-126

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5-57

Index

Storage compartment 4-114

Center console storage 4-114

Cool box 4-115

Glove box 4-114

Luggage net 4-115

Luggage tray 4-116

Sunroof 4-36

Sunvisor 4-120

T

Tachometer 4-47

Tailgate 4-24

Emergency safety release 4-25

Telescoping steering 4-41

Tether anchor system....3-28

Theft-alarm system....4-14

Tilt steering....4-41

Tire and loading information label 5-56

Tire chains....5-53

Tire Mobility Kit....6-23

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)....6-9

Tire specification and pressure label 8-10

Tires and wheels....7-51, 8-5

Checking tire inflation pressure 7-52

Compact spare tire replacement....7-55

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures....7-51

Tire care....7-51

Tire maintenance 7-56

Tire replacement....7-55

Tire rotation....7-53

Tire sidewall labeling 7-56

Tire traction 7-56

Wheel alignment and tire balance....7-54

Wheel replacement....7-56

Towing 6-29

Towing capacity 5-57

Transaxle

Automatic transaxle 5-16

Manual transaxle 5-13

Trip computer 4-50

Trunk 4-22

U

User settings 4-55

V

Vehicle break-in process....1-5

Vehicle capacity weight 5-56

Vehicle certification label 8-9

Vehicle curb weight 5-61

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders

Vehicle identification number (VIN) 8-9

Index

Vehicle load limit 5-56

Cargo capacity....5-57

Certification label 5-59

Seating capacity....5-57

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit....5-57

Tire and loading information label 5-56

Towing capacity....5-57

Vehicle capacity weight....5-56

Vehicle stability management (VSM) 5-31

Volume/weight 8-6

Base curb weight 5-61

Cargo weight 5-61

GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-61

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) 5-61

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)....5-61

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)....5-61

Vehicle curb weight....5-61

W

Warning and indicators....4-59

Washer fluid....7-40

Weight/volume 8-6

Wheel alignment and tire balance 7-54

Wheel replacement 7-56

Windows 4-26

Auto down window 4-27

Auto up/down window 4-28

Power window lock button 4-29

Windshield defrosting and defogging....4-109

Windshield defrosting and defogging

Defogging logic 4-111

Winter driving....5-52

Snow tires....5-52

Tire chains 5-53

Wiper blades 7-45

Wipers and washers 4-81

© 2015 KIA MOTORS AMERICA, INC.